Page 1 — RELION® PROTECTION AND CONTROL REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 4 Copyright This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Page 5 In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Page 6 Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2014/35/EU). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by the third party testing laboratory Intertek in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive.
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Table of contents Table of contents Section 1 Introduction..............47 This manual..................47 Intended audience................47 Product documentation..............48 Product documentation set............48 Document revision history............48 Related documentation..............49 Symbols and conventions..............49 Symbols..................49 Document conventions..............50 Functions, codes and symbols............ 50 Section 2 REX640 overview............59 Overview...................59 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version......59 Relay hardware ................
Page 8 Table of contents RS-485 bias and termination settings..........93 Serial link diagnostics and monitoring......... 93 Modbus protocol MBSLPRT............94 Function block................ 94 Functionality................95 DNP3 protocol DNPLPRT............95 Function block................ 95 Functionality................95 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol I3CLPRT..........96 Function block................ 96 Functionality................96 Self-supervision................
Page 9 Table of contents Station authority level “L,R,L+R”..........126 Station authority level “L,S,R”............127 Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R”......128 Control mode................129 Signals..................130 Settings..................130 Monitored data................131 Fault recorder FLTRFRC..............132 Function block................132 Functionality ................132 Analog channel configuration............ 133 Signals..................134 Settings..................135 Monitored data................136 Nonvolatile memory................145 Analog measurement channels............
Page 10 Table of contents Signals..................172 Settings..................174 Monitored data................177 SMV function blocks............... 179 SMV stream sender (IEC 61850-9-2LE) SMVSENDER....180 Function block..............180 Functionality................. 180 Settings................180 SMV stream receiver (IEC 61850-9-2LE) SMVRCV....180 Function block..............180 Functionality................. 181 Signals..................181 Preprocessing blocks..............181 Phase current preprocessing ILTCTR........
Page 11 Table of contents Received GOOSE measured value information GOOSERCV_MV ..............195 Function block..............195 Functionality................. 195 Signals..................195 Received GOOSE 8-bit integer value information GOOSERCV_INT8 ..............195 Function block..............195 Functionality................. 196 Signals..................196 Received GOOSE 32-bit integer value information GOOSERCV_INT32 ..............196 Function block..............
Page 12 Table of contents Functionality................. 202 Signals..................202 Fault direction evaluation T_DIR..........203 Function block..............203 Functionality................. 203 Signals..................203 Enumerator to boolean conversion T_TCMD ......204 Function block..............204 Functionality................. 204 Signals..................204 32-bit integer to binary command conversion T_TCMD_BIN..205 Function block..............205 Functionality.................
Page 13 Table of contents Minimum pulse timer..............212 Minimum pulse timer, two channels TPGAPC..... 212 Minimum pulse timer second resolution, two channels TPSGAPC................213 Minimum pulse timer minutes resolution, two channels TPMGAPC................215 Pulse timer, eight channels PTGAPC........216 Identification................. 216 Function block..............216 Functionality.................
Page 14 Table of contents Technical data..............228 SR flip-flop, eight channels, nonvolatile SRGAPC....228 Identification................. 228 Function block..............229 Functionality................. 229 Signals..................229 Settings................230 Boolean value event creation MVGAPC........231 Identification................. 231 Function block..............231 Functionality................. 231 Signals..................231 Settings................232 Integer value event creation MVI4GAPC........232 Identification.................
Page 15 Table of contents Identification................. 244 Function block..............244 Functionality................. 244 Operation principle............... 245 Application................248 Hotline tag HLTGAPC............... 249 Identification................. 249 Function block..............249 Functionality................. 249 Operation principle............... 250 Application................251 Signals..................251 Settings................252 Monitored data..............252 Voltage switch VMSWI.............. 252 Identification................. 252 Function block..............
Page 16 Table of contents Signals..................263 Transformer data combiner OLGAPC........263 Identification................. 263 Function block..............263 Functionality................. 263 Operation principle............... 263 Application................264 Signals..................264 Controllable gate, 8 channels GATEGAPC....... 264 Identification................. 264 Function block..............265 Functionality................. 265 Signals..................265 Settings................266 Standard logic operators..............267 OR gate with two inputs OR, six inputs OR6 and twenty inputs OR20..................
Page 17 Table of contents Functionality................. 273 Signals..................273 Settings................274 Switching device status decoder CLOSE position T_POS_CL, OPEN position T_POS_OP and OK status T_POS_OK................274 Function block..............274 Functionality................. 274 Signals..................274 Settings................275 SR flip-flop, volatile SR..............275 Function block..............275 Functionality................. 275 Signals..................276 RS flip-flop, volatile RS..............276 Function block..............
Page 18 Table of contents Function block..............284 Functionality................. 284 Signals..................285 Real less than or equal comparator LER........285 Function block..............285 Functionality................. 285 Signals..................286 Real maximum value selector MAX3R........286 Function block..............286 Functionality................. 286 Signals..................287 Real minimum value selector MIN3R........287 Function block..............
Page 19 Table of contents Diagnostics................296 Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH........297 Function block..............297 Functionality................. 297 Signals..................297 Settings................298 Monitored data..............299 Diagnostics................299 External HMI wake-up EIHMI............300 Function block................300 Functionality................300 Operation principle..............300 Application................. 301 Signals..................301 Settings..................302 Monitored data................302 HMI Ethernet channel supervision HMILCCH........ 302 Function block................
Page 20 Table of contents Three-phase directional overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC..325 Identification................. 325 Function block..............326 Functionality................. 326 Analog channel configuration..........326 Operation principle .............. 327 Measurement modes............332 Directional overcurrent characteristics ........ 332 Application................340 Signals..................342 Settings................343 Monitored data..............347 Technical data..............348 Three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection PHPVOC...................
Page 21 Table of contents Application................371 Signals..................373 Settings................373 Monitored data..............374 Technical data..............375 Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC........375 Identification................. 375 Function block..............375 Functionality................. 375 Analog channel configuration..........375 Operation principle............... 376 Application................377 Signals..................378 Settings................378 Monitored data..............378 Technical data..............379 Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC........
Page 22 Table of contents Operation principle............... 388 Application................396 Signals..................400 Settings................401 Monitored data..............402 Technical data..............402 Earth-fault protection..............403 Non-directional earth-fault protection EFxPTOC....... 403 Identification................. 403 Function block..............403 Functionality................. 403 Analog channel configuration..........403 Operation principle............... 404 Measurement modes............406 Timer characteristics............
Page 23 Table of contents Settings................452 Monitored data..............452 Technical data..............453 Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM....453 Identification................. 453 Function block..............453 Functionality................. 453 Analog channel configuration..........454 Operation principle............... 455 Neutral admittance characteristics........467 Application................473 Signals..................478 Settings................479 Monitored data..............480 Technical data..............
Page 24 Table of contents Timer characteristics............502 Measurement modes............505 Application................505 Signals..................507 Settings................507 Monitored data..............508 Technical data..............509 Third harmonic-based stator earth-fault protection H3EFPSEF 509 Identification................. 509 Function block..............510 Functionality................. 510 Analog channel configuration..........510 Operation principle............... 511 Application................514 Signals..................520 Settings................
Page 25 Table of contents Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two- winding transformers TR2PTDF..........591 Identification................. 591 Function block..............592 Functionality................. 592 Analog channel configuration..........592 Operation principle............... 593 Application................606 CT connections and transformation ratio correction.....618 Signals..................622 Settings................623 Monitored data..............625 Technical data..............
Page 26 Table of contents Functionality................. 672 Analog channel configuration..........673 Operation principle............... 673 Application................674 The measuring configuration..........677 Recommendations for current transformers ......677 Setting examples..............682 Signals..................685 Settings................686 Monitored data..............686 Technical data..............687 High-impedance differential protection HIxPDIF....... 687 Identification................. 687 Function block..............687 Functionality.................
Page 27 Table of contents Recommendations for current transformers ......725 Example calculations for high-impedance differential protection................730 Signals..................733 Settings................733 Monitored data..............734 Technical data..............734 Unbalance protection..............735 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC....735 Identification................. 735 Function block..............735 Functionality................. 735 Analog channel configuration..........735 Operation principle...............
Page 28 Table of contents Identification................. 753 Function block..............754 Functionality................. 754 Analog input configuration............754 Operation principle............... 754 Application................755 Signals..................756 Settings................756 Monitored data..............756 Technical data..............757 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines MNSPTOC.................757 Identification................. 757 Function block..............757 Functionality................. 757 Analog channel configuration..........758 Operation principle...............
Page 29 Table of contents Application................779 Signals..................780 Settings................780 Monitored data..............781 Technical data..............782 Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV......782 Identification................. 782 Function block..............782 Functionality................. 782 Analog channel configuration..........783 Operation principle............... 783 Application................784 Signals..................785 Settings................785 Monitored data..............786 Technical data..............786 Positive-sequence overvoltage protection PSPTOV....
Page 30 Table of contents Application................798 Signals..................799 Settings................799 Monitored data..............800 Technical data..............800 Overexcitation protection OEPVPH...........801 Identification................. 801 Function block..............801 Functionality................. 801 Analog channel configuration..........801 Operation principle............... 802 Timer characteristics............805 Application................810 Signals..................814 Settings................815 Monitored data..............816 Technical data..............
Page 31 Table of contents Analog channel configuration..........831 Operation principle............... 832 Application................835 Signals..................836 Settings................836 Monitored data..............837 Technical data..............837 Frequency protection..............837 Frequency protection FRPFRQ..........837 Identification................. 837 Function block..............838 Functionality................. 838 Analog channel configuration..........838 Operation principle............... 839 Application................843 Signals..................844 Settings................
Page 32 Table of contents Out of step protection with double blinders OOSRPSB.....921 Identification................. 921 Function block..............921 Functionality................. 921 Analog channel configuration..........922 Operation principle............... 922 Application................928 Signals..................929 Settings................930 Monitored data..............931 Technical data..............931 Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS....932 Identification.................
Page 33 Table of contents Monitored data..............959 Technical data..............959 Reverse power/directional overpower protection DOPPDPR..960 Identification................. 960 Function block..............960 Functionality................. 960 Analog channel configuration..........961 Operation principle............... 961 Application................965 Signals..................968 Settings................968 Monitored data..............969 Technical data..............969 Directional reactive power undervoltage protection DQPTUV...969 Identification.................
Page 34 Table of contents Settings..................991 Monitored data................991 Technical data................992 Motor start-up supervision STTPMSU..........992 Identification................992 Function block................992 Functionality................992 Analog input configuration............993 Operation principle..............993 Application................1000 Signals..................1003 Settings..................1004 Monitored data.................1005 Technical data................. 1005 Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC..........1006 Identification................
Page 35 Table of contents Application................1027 Signals................1030 Settings................1030 Monitored data..............1031 Technical data..............1032 Three-phase current unbalance protection for shunt capacitor banks HCUBPTOC..........1033 Identification............... 1033 Function block..............1033 Functionality ..............1033 Analog channel configuration..........1033 Operation principle............. 1034 Application .................1039 Signals................1041 Settings................
Page 36 Table of contents Identification................1061 Function block................. 1061 Functionality................1061 Analog channel configuration..........1061 Operation principle..............1062 Application................1063 Signals..................1064 Settings..................1065 Monitored data.................1065 Technical data................. 1066 Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF........ 1066 Identification................1066 Function block................. 1066 Functionality................1066 Analog channel configuration..........1067 Operation principle..............
Page 37 Table of contents Functionality................1088 Operation principle..............1088 Application................1089 Signals..................1090 Settings..................1091 Monitored data.................1092 Technical data................. 1092 Emergency start-up ESMGAPC........... 1092 Identification................1092 Function block................. 1092 Functionality................1092 Analog channel configuration..........1092 Operation principle..............1093 Application................1094 Signals..................1094 Settings..................1094 Monitored data.................1095 Technical data.................
Page 38 Table of contents Function block................. 1132 Functionality................1132 Analog channel configuration..........1133 Operation principle..............1133 Application................1136 Signals..................1137 Settings..................1138 Monitored data.................1138 Technical data................. 1139 Scheme communication logic DSOCPSCH......... 1139 Identification................1139 Function block................. 1139 Functionality................1139 Operation principle..............1140 Application................1147 Signals..................1152 Settings..................1153 Monitored data.................1153...
Page 39 Table of contents Function block................. 1177 Functionality................1177 Analog channel configuration..........1177 Operation principle..............1178 Application................1180 Signals..................1182 Settings..................1183 Monitored data.................1183 Technical data................. 1183 Three-phase power directional element DPSRDIR...... 1184 Identification................1184 Function block................. 1184 Functionality................1184 Analog channel configuration..........1184 Operation principle..............
Page 40 Table of contents Analog channel configuration..........1206 Operation principle..............1207 Application................1209 Signals..................1213 Settings..................1214 Monitored data.................1214 Technical data................. 1214 Current transformer supervision for high-impedance protection scheme HZCCxSPVC..............1215 Identification................1215 Function block................. 1215 Functionality................1215 Analog channel configuration..........1216 Operation principle..............1216 Measuring modes..............
Page 41 Table of contents Functionality................1234 Operation principle..............1234 Application................1235 Signals..................1236 Settings..................1236 Monitored data.................1237 Technical data................. 1237 Motor start counter MSCPMRI............. 1237 Identification................1237 Function block................. 1237 Functionality................1237 Operation principle..............1238 Application................1239 Signals..................1239 Settings..................1240 Monitored data.................1240 Three-phase remanent undervoltage supervision MSVPR..1241 Identification................
Page 42 Table of contents Analog input configuration............1253 Operation principle..............1254 Circuit breaker status............1255 Circuit breaker operation monitoring........1256 Breaker contact travel time..........1257 Operation counter...............1259 Accumulation of I t..............1260 Remaining life of circuit breaker......... 1261 Circuit breaker spring-charged indication......1263 Gas pressure supervision...........1263 Application................
Page 43 Table of contents Function block..............1302 Functionality............... 1302 Analog channel configuration..........1302 Signals................1303 Settings................1304 Monitored data..............1304 Technical data..............1306 Single-phase voltage measurement VAMMXU....... 1306 Identification............... 1306 Function block..............1307 Functionality............... 1307 Analog channel configuration..........1307 Signals................1308 Settings................1308 Monitored data..............
Page 44 Table of contents Identification............... 1318 Function block..............1318 Functionality............... 1318 Analog channel configuration..........1318 Signals................1319 Settings................1319 Monitored data..............1321 Technical data..............1322 Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI......1322 Identification............... 1322 Function block..............1322 Functionality............... 1323 Analog channel configuration..........1323 Signals................1323 Settings................1324 Monitored data..............
Page 45 Table of contents Settings..................1340 Monitored data.................1341 Disturbance recorder, analog channels 1...24 A1RADR and A2RADR..................1342 Function block................. 1342 Signals..................1342 Settings..................1342 Disturbance recorder, binary channels 1...64 B1RBDR and B2RBDR..................1343 Function block................. 1343 Signals..................1344 Settings..................1344 Tap changer position indication TPOSYLTC........1345 Identification................1345 Function block.................
Page 46 Table of contents Application................1373 Signals..................1375 Settings..................1377 Monitored data.................1378 Three-state disconnector position indication P3SSXSWI.....1378 Identification................1378 Function block................. 1379 Functionality................1379 Operation principle..............1379 Application................1380 Signals..................1380 Settings..................1381 Monitored data.................1381 Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and Earthing switch position indication ESSXSWI............1382 Identification................
Page 47 Table of contents Monitored data.................1427 Technical data................. 1428 Autosynchronizer for network breaker ASNSCSYN..... 1429 Identification................1429 Function block................. 1429 Functionality................1429 Analog input configuration............1430 Operation principle..............1431 Application................1441 Signals..................1444 Settings..................1445 Monitored data.................1446 Technical data................. 1448 Autosynchronizer co-ordinator ASCGAPC........1448 Identification................
Page 48 Table of contents Tap changer control with voltage regulator OL5ATCC....1538 Identification................1538 Function block................. 1538 Functionality................1539 Analog channel configuration..........1539 Operation principle..............1540 Voltage and current measurements........1541 Tap changer position inputs..........1542 Operation mode selection..........1543 Manual voltage regulation..........1545 Automatic voltage regulation of single transformers (Auto single).................1546 Automatic voltage regulation of parallel transformers...
Page 49 Table of contents Operation principle..............1602 Application................1606 Signals..................1607 Settings..................1609 Monitored data.................1609 Technical data................. 1612 Voltage total harmonic distortion, DC component (THD, DC) and individual harmonics VHMHAI............1612 Identification................1612 Function block................. 1613 Functionality................1613 Analog channel configuration..........1614 Operation principle..............1614 Application................
Page 50 Table of contents Settings..................1649 Monitored data.................1650 Technical data................. 1651 Section 11 General function block features......... 1653 Definite time characteristics............1653 Definite time operation.............1653 Current based inverse definite minimum time characteristics..1656 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection........1656 Standard inverse-time characteristics........ 1660 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics....
Page 51 Table of contents Non-directional overcurrent protection....... 1714 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection....1715 Current transformer requirements for transformer differential protection.................1716 Section 13 Protection relay's physical connections......1721 Module diagrams................1721 Communication modules.............. 1729 Arc sensor interface..............1730 Section 14 Technical data............1733 Section 15 Protection relay and functionality tests.......1741 Section 16 Applicable standards and regulations......
Page 53: Section 1 Introduction
Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Section 1 Introduction This manual The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
Page 54: Product Documentation
Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Product documentation 1.3.1 Product documentation set Quick installation guide Brochure Product guide Operation manual Installation manual Engineering manual Technical manual Application manual Communication protocol manual IEC 61850 engineering guide Cyber security deployment guideline Hardware modification instructions Modification sales guideline GUID-65F8531E-8455-4F6C-BEFE-86B0B518D4E6 V1 EN Figure 1:...
Page 55: Related Documentation
1MRS759029 IEC 61850 interface in REX640 IEC 61850 Ed2 Model Implementation Conformance Statement 1MRS759028 (MICS) for REX640 Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site www.abb.com/relion. Symbols and conventions 1.4.1 Symbols The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock.
Page 56: Document Conventions
Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fully with all warning and caution notices.
Page 57 Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Three-phase non-directional PHIPTOC 3I>>> overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHLPDOC 3I> -> 67P/51P-1 protection, low stage Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHHPDOC 3I>> -> 67P/51P-2 protection, high stage Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFLPTOC Io>...
Page 58 Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Three-phase thermal protection for T1PTTR 3Ith>F feeders, cables and distribution transformers Three-phase thermal overload T2PTTR 3Ith>T/G/C 49T/G/C protection, two time constants Three-phase overload protection for COLPTOC 3I> 3I< 51,37,86C shunt capacitor banks Current unbalance protection for CUBPTOC...
Page 59 Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Stabilized and instantaneous MPDIF 3dl>M/G 87M/87G differential protection for machines Underpower factor protection MPUPF PF< Stabilized and instantaneous TR3PTDF 3dI>3W 87T3 differential protection for two- or three-winding transformers Stabilized and instantaneous TR2PTDF 3dI>T differential protection for two-winding...
Page 60 Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Tap changer control with voltage OL5ATCC COLTC regulator Transformer data combiner OLGAPC OLGAPC OLGAPC Petersen coil controller PASANCR ANCR Condition monitoring and supervision Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR CBCM 52CM Hot-spot and insulation ageing rate HSARSPTR 3Ihp>T...
Page 61 Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Voltage total harmonic distortion, DC VHMHAI PQM3VH PQM VTHD,VDC component (THD, DC) and individual harmonics Voltage variation PHQVVR PQMU PQMV SWE,SAG,INT Voltage unbalance VSQVUB PQUUB PQMV UB Traditional LED indication LED indication control LEDPTRC LEDPTRC...
Page 62 Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Integer 32-bit switch selector SWITCHI32 SWITCHI32 SWITCHI32 SR flip-flop, volatile RS flip-flop, volatile Minimum pulse timer, two channels TPGAPC 62TP Minimum pulse timer second TPSGAPC 62TPS resolution, two channels Minimum pulse timer minutes TPMGAPC 62TPM...
Page 63 Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI SMV stream sender (IEC SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER 61850-9-2LE) Redundant Ethernet channel RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH supervison Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH HMI Ethernet channel supervision HMILCCH HMILCCH HMILCCH Received GOOSE binary information GOOSERCV_BIN GOOSERCV_BIN GOOSERCV_BIN...
Page 64 Section 1 1MRS759142 C Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Integer 32-bit to real conversion T_I32_TO_R T_I32_TO_R T_I32_TO_R Real to integer 8-bit conversion T_R_TO_I8 T_R_TO_I8 T_R_TO_I8 Real to integer 32-bit conversion T_R_TO_I32 T_R_TO_I32 T_R_TO_I32 Constant FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE Constant TRUE TRUE TRUE...
Page 65: Section 2 Rex640 Overview
• Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 2.9 Hotfix 1 or later • REX640 Connectivity Package Ver.1.0 or later Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site www.abb.com/relion or directly with Update Manager in PCM600. Relay hardware The relay includes a Ready LED on the power supply module that indicates the relay's status.
Page 66 Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview Table 2: Module slots Module Slot A1 Slot A2 Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F Slot G ARC1001 COM1001 ● COM1002 ● COM1003 ● COM1004 ● COM1005 ● BIO1001 ● BIO1002 ●...
Page 67 Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview GUID-5D4C7B10-17CA-4F59-B9E0-8024CB82CDE8 V1 EN Figure 2: Hardware module slot overview of the REX640 relay 1 Slot markings in enclosure (top and bottom) 2 Ready LED Table 3: Module description Module Description ARC1001 4 × ARC sensor inputs (lense, loop or mixed) COM1001 1 ×...
Page 68: Local Hmi
Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview Module Description BIO1001/ 14 × BI + 8 × SO BIO1003 BIO1002/ 6 × SPO + 2 × SPO (TCS) + 9 × BI BIO1004 RTD1001 10 × RTD channels + 2 × mA channels (input/output) AIM1001 4 ×...
Page 69 Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview GUID-093E5A0B-C7B9-4BEC-8EA6-42EF75793B4F V1 EN Figure 3: Example of a local HMI page The LHMI presents pages in two categories. • Operator pages are typically required as a part of an operator’s normal activities, such as a single-line diagram, controls, measurements, events or alarms •...
Page 70 Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview Table 4: Power supply module Ready LED and local HMI Home button LED State Power supply module LHMI Home button Alarm acknowledged Ready LED Relay under normal Steady green Steady green operation and LHMI connected Relay’s IRF activated, High frequency blinking...
Page 71 Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview 9 10 GUID-01F7FC3E-980D-4670-B195-F8D6D712EF58 V2 EN Figure 4: Menu bar elements Bay name for the relay Page name Edit mode active (parameter editing) Date, time and time synchronization status Page help (visible if help is available for the page) Login button/logged in user indication Local/remote indication USB memory not connected/connected (visible only if USB port is enabled)
Page 72: Physical Ports
Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview Page category Pages Subpages Engineer pages Parameters Testing and Force Functions Commissioning Force Outputs Simulate Inputs View I/O Send Events Secondary Injection Monitoring Protection Measurement Direction Coil Controller Commissioning View GOOSE sending View GOOSE receiving View SMV sending View SMV receiving Relay Status...
Page 73: Web Hmi
Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview Additionally, the LHMI contains one Ethernet service port with an RJ-45 connector and one USB port. The service port can be used for the PCM600 connection or for WHMI connection. Data transfer to a USB stick is enabled via the USB port. By default the USB port is disabled and has to be taken into use with a specific parameter.
Page 74 Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview GUID-85504DBF-C4B1-43B2-A569-A543E61072E7 V2 EN Figure 7: Example view of the Web HMI WHMI offers several functions. The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI. Table 6: Web HMI main groups and submenus Main groups Submenus Description...
Page 75: User Authorization
Section 2 1MRS759142 C REX640 overview User authorization The user management for the protection relay can be handled in two possible ways. Only one user management way can be enabled in the protection relay at a time. This can be done with the Device CAM mode parameter in Account Management in PCM600.
Page 76: Station Communication
If it is needed to use the possibilities provided by the Modification Sales concept, please contact your local ABB unit. REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 77: Section 3 Basic Functions
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Section 3 Basic functions General parameters Table 8: Authorization settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Security/Remote Update 0=Disable 0=Disable Remote update 1=Enable Security/Thumbprint ClientThumb Print Passwords/Remote 0=False 1=True Disable authority override 1=True Passwords/Local 0=False 1=True...
Page 78 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Input threshold 10...50 Global binary input hysteresis for all slots hysteresis Input osc. level 2...50 events/s Binary input oscillation suppression threshold Input osc. hyst 2...50 events/s Binary input oscillation suppression hysteresis Table 10: Network address settings...
Page 79 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Web HMI mode 0=Off 1=On Web HMI functionality 1=On HMI timeout 1...60 HMI login timeout SLD symbol format 1=IEC 1=IEC Single Line Diagram symbol format 2=ANSI Autoscroll delay 0...30 Autoscroll delay for Measurements view Setting visibility...
Page 80 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Frame2InUse -1=Not in use -1=Not in use Active Class2 Frame 2 0=User frame 1=Standard frame 2=Standard frame 3=Standard frame 4=Standard frame 5=Standard frame 6=Private frame 6 7=Private frame 7 Frame3InUse -1=Not in use -1=Not in use...
Page 81 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Block Monitoring 0=Not in use 0=Not in use Blocking of Monitoring Direction 1=Discard events 2=Keep events Internal Overflow 0=False 0=False Internal Overflow: TRUE-System level 1=True overflow occured (indication only) EC_FRZ 0=False 0=False...
Page 82 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CRC order 0=Hi-Lo 0=Hi-Lo Selects between normal or swapped byte 1=Lo-Hi order for checksum for serial connection. Default: Hi-Lo. Client IP 0.0.0.0 Sets the IP address of the client. If set to zero, connection from any client is accepted.
Page 83 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 16: DNP3 settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 5=off Operation Off / On 5=off Port 1=COM 1 3=Ethernet - TCP Communication interface selection 2=COM 2 3=Ethernet - TCP 1 4=Ethernet TCP +UDP 1 Unit address...
Page 84 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description UR Class 1 TO 0...65535 Max holding time for class 1 events to generate UR UR Class 2 Min events 0...999 Min number of class 2 events to generate UR Class 2 TO 0...65535 Max holding time for class 2 events to...
Page 85 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Default Var Obj 30 1=1:32bit AI 5=5:AI float 1=32 bit AI; 2=16 bit AI; 3=32 bit AI without 2=2:16bit AI flag; 4=16 bit AI without flag; 5=AI float; 3=3:32bit AI noflag 6=AI double.
Page 86 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 17: COM1 serial communication settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Fiber mode 0=No fiber 0=No fiber Fiber mode 1=Fiber light ON loop 2=Fiber light OFF loop 3=Fiber light ON star 4=Fiber light OFF star Serial mode 1=RS485 2Wire...
Page 87: Communication
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Communication The protection relay supports a range of communication protocols including IEC ® 61850, IEC 61850-9-2 LE, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus and DNP3. Profibus DPV1 communication protocol is supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302. Operational information and controls are available through these protocols.
Page 88: Self-Healing Ethernet Ring
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.2.1 Self-healing Ethernet ring The protection relay supports a self-healing ring solution for small installations. For the correct operation of self-healing ring topology, the network topology must be a ring. It is essential that the external switches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in the switches.
Page 89 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions IEC 62439-3:2012 cancels and replaces the first edition published in 2010. These standard versions are also referred to as IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439-3 Edition 2. The protection relay supports IEC 62439-3:2016 (Edition 3) and IEC 62439-3:2012 and it is not compatible with IEC 62439-3:2010.
Page 90: Process Bus
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions • Via an external redundancy box (RedBox) or a switch capable of connecting to PRP and normal networks • By connecting the node directly to LAN A or LAN B as SAN • By connecting the node to the protection relay's interlink port HSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring, treating the two directions as two virtual LANs.
Page 91 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Redundant SMV streams are also supported by using the voltage (VMSWI) and current (CMSWI) function blocks. Automatic switching to the backup SMV stream can be configured in Application Configuration using SMV quality and/or other logic. UniGear Digital switchgear concept relies on the process bus together with current and voltage sensors.
Page 92: Secure Communication
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Primary Secondary IEEE 1588 v2 IEEE 1588 v2 master clock master clock (optional) Managed HSR Managed HSR Ethernet Ethernet switch switch IEC 61850 Backup 1588 master clock GUID-7C56BC1F-F1B2-4E74-AB8E-05001A88D53D V6 EN Figure 11: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization 3.2.4 Secure communication...
Page 93 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 19: Secondary IP address parameters Parameter Options Description Configuration/Communication/ False (default) Network 2 disabled Ethernet/Network 2 address/ TRUE Network 2 enabled Enable Configuration/Communication/ 0.0.0.0 IP address for Network 2 Ethernet/Network 2 address/IP address Configuration/Communication/ 0.0.0.0 Subnet address for Network 2...
Page 94: Protocol Control
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions ARC1001 COM1001 COM1002 COM1003 GUID-A553A618-23A2-4128-9B0C-76A3C5CF123E V1 EN Figure 12: Ethernet modes with Network 1 and Network 2 1 Network 1 2 Network 1/Network 2 3.2.5.2 Protocol control It is possible to allow or block different protocols for different network interfaces in the protection relay using the parameters in Configuration/Communication/ Protocols/Network1, Configuration/Communication/Protocols/Network2 and Configuration/Communication/Protocols/HMI Port.
Page 95: Protocol Write Access Rights
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions All protocols are allowed for each network by default, and can be separately disabled. Table 20: Protocol control in the protection relay Parameter Options Description Configuration/Communication/ Denies FTP and FTPS Protocols/Network1/FTP On (Default) Allows FTP and FTPS Secure Allows FTPS only Configuration/Communication/...
Page 96 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 21: Protocol write access in the protection relay Parameter Options Description Configuration/Authorization/ FTP write access denied for Network1/FTP write access Network 1 On (Default) FTP write access allowed for Network 1 Configuration/Authorization/ IEC 61850 MMS write access Network1/MMS write access denied for Network 1 On (Default)
Page 97: Serial Port Supervision Serlcch
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.2.6 Serial port supervision SERLCCH 3.2.6.1 Function block SERLCCH1 CH1LIV LNK1LIV GUID-80EDD5DC-F5E0-4676-A560-1BE0ED6CFD39 V1 EN Figure 13: Function block 3.2.6.2 Functionality The serial port supervision function SERLCCH represents one serial communication port driver. Depending on the hardware configuration, the protection relay can be equipped with two UART-based serial communication ports.
Page 98 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions • X7 is the fiber-optic interface. Only driver COM2 can be configured into fiber- optic mode. • X8 is the RS-485/IRIG-B interface. Both drivers COM1 and COM2 can be configured to this interface: COM1 and COM2 can act as two RS-485 2-wire links or, alternatively, COM1 can act as one single RS-485 4-wire link.
Page 99: Rs-485 Bias And Termination Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Description X8 TX RS-485/COM2 X8 TX RS-485/COM1 IRIG-B IRIG-B 3.2.9 RS-485 bias and termination settings A 6 x DIP switch is located on the bottom side of the COM1004...COM1005 boards. RS-485 biasing and termination settings are possible through this switch. If the switch is in “OFF”...
Page 100: Modbus Protocol Mbslprt
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 26: Diagnostic counters and indications Counters Description Characters received Counts all incoming non-erroneous characters. This counter operates regardless of whether the serial driver is set to detect a whole protocol link frame or just separate characters. Frames received Counts all protocol-specific non-erroneous frames received.
Page 101: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.2.11.2 Functionality The function block represents a Modbus server protocol instance in the protection relay. Function block settings include communication interface assignment for the instance, that is, Ethernet/TCP or serial. A Modbus server protocol instance is activated if the function block instance is added to the application configuration.
Page 102: Iec 60870-5-103 Protocol I3Clprt
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions “Mapping 1” and “Mapping 2”, and either can be used. Setting parameter Mapping selection points to the mapping set used. Several DNP3 protocol instances can point to the same mapping set. For more information on the DNP3 server protocol, see the DNP3 communication protocol manual.
Page 103: Self-Supervision
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Self-supervision The protection relay's extensive self-supervision system continuously supervises the software and the electronics. It handles the run-time fault situation and informs the user about a fault via the LHMI, the relay's main unit power module Ready LED and through the communication channels.
Page 104: Internal Faults
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-C1CB83B9-C8C1-4FBC-AD6A-664E7684ACE4 V1 EN Figure 19: Relay self-supervision status on Web HMI In addition, the last boot reason and time are shown on both LHMI and WHMI. 3.3.1 Internal faults When an internal relay fault is detected, relay protection operation is disabled and the self-supervision output contact is activated.
Page 105 The internal fault code indicates the type of internal relay fault. When a fault appears, the code must be recorded so that it can be reported to ABB customer service. More details about the active internal fault are found on the Relay Status page. On the LHMI, the internal fault state is indicated with a red LED.
Page 106 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-6FAA2FE1-AA4A-4DF4-B1CE-55F8B00BDE33 V1 EN Figure 22: More information about the fault On the WHMI, internal fault information is shown under Self-Supervision Status. GUID-D4B0F232-B2CC-49A7-9C54-5F880CDE4D34 V1 EN Figure 23: Internal fault information on Web HMI Table 27: Internal fault indications and codes Fault indication Fault code...
Page 107 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Fault indication Fault code Additional information SO-relay(s),slot C Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in module located in slot C SO-relay(s),slot E Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in module located in slot E SO-relay(s),slot B Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in module located in slot B SO-relay(s),slot D Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in...
Page 108: Warnings
LHMI Home button flashes red. If a warning appears, record the name and code so that it can be provided to ABB customer service. On the LHMI, an active warning is indicated with a yellow LED. More information about the warning and recovery options can be accessed by tapping More Information.
Page 109 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-07E927E8-22D8-4DB3-93A7-DDDC4C3E5787 V1 EN Figure 24: Active warning on local HMI More information shows all active warnings and corresponding fault codes. In addition, a recovery procedure is described. GUID-D35FF83D-0266-4E9E-A056-E1276C32AEA1 V1 EN Figure 25: More information about the warning REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 110 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 28: Warning indications and codes Warning indication Warning code Additional information Watchdog reset A watchdog reset has occurred. Power down det. The auxiliary supply voltage has dropped too low. DNP3 warning Error in the DNP3 communication Dataset warning Error in the Data set(s)
Page 111: Power Supply Module Ready Led And Local Hmi Home Button Led
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.3.3 Power supply module Ready LED and local HMI Home button LED Both power supply module Ready LED and LHMI Home button LED visualize the self-supervision state of the relay. Table 29 shows how these states are indicated. Table 29: Power supply module Ready LED and local HMI Home button LED State...
Page 112: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.4.2 Functionality The protection relay includes a global conditioning function LEDPTRC that is used to control the virtual Start and Trip indication LEDs. LED indication control should never be used for tripping purposes. There is a separate trip logic function TRPPTRC available in the relay configuration.
Page 113: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.5.3 Functionality The virtual, programmable LEDs are visible on the Programmable LEDs page in LHMI and on the WHMI dashboard. GUID-C14793AC-B2A0-4A72-88F3-F7295A46CD76 V1 EN Figure 28: Programmable LEDs page in LHMI GUID-C95834F1-213F-441D-B32C-01B68CB30C45 V1 EN Figure 29: Programmable LEDs status in WHMI Programmable LEDs are available only when at least one LED has been instantiated and the OK or ALARM signal is connected in Application Configuration in PCM600.
Page 114 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions "Red". The OK input corresponds to the color that is available, with the default value being "Green". Changing the Alarm colour setting to "Green" changes the color behavior of the OK inputs to red. The ALARM input has a higher priority than the OK input.
Page 115 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions "Follow-S": Follow Signal, ON In this mode ALARM follows the input signal value, Non-latched. Activating signal GUID-FC749ABD-369E-46DC-AF45-9C4D386C7B4C V1 EN Figure 32: Operating sequence "Follow-S" "Follow-F": Follow Signal, Flashing Similar to "Follow-S", but instead the LED is flashing when the input is active, Non- latched.
Page 116: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Activating signal Acknow. GUID-34D7C4CF-F1E0-465B-ACC7-2D28222F7147 V1 EN Figure 34: Operating sequence "LatchedAck-F-S" 3.5.4 Signals Table 30: Input signals for LEDs 1...33 Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for the LED ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for the LED RESET BOOLEAN...
Page 117: Time Synchronization
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 33: IEC 61850 mapping LED instance in Application Configuration Mapping in IEC 61850 data model (ALARM and OK signals) LED1...LED11 LEDGGIO1.Alm1...LEDGGIO1.Alm11 LEDGGIO1.Ind1...LEDGGIO1.Ind11 LED12...LED22 LEDGGIO1.Alm11...LEDGGIO1.Alm22 LEDGGIO1.Ind12...LEDGGIO1.Ind22 LED23...LED33 LEDGGIO1.Alm23...LEDGGIO1.Alm33 LEDGGIO1.Ind23...LEDGGIO1.Ind33 Time synchronization 3.6.1 Time master supervision GNRLLTMS 3.6.1.1 Function block GUID-00452AE5-6042-4B15-9CE6-18EF5E2CF542 V1 EN...
Page 118 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions The protection relay supports SNTP, IRIG-B, IEEE 1588 v2, DNP3, Modbus, IEC 60870-5-101/104 and IEC 60870-5-103 to update the real-time clock. IEEE 1588 v2 with the GPS grandmaster clock provides the accuracy of ±1 µs. The accuracy is ±1 µs with IRIG-B and ±1 ms with SNTP.
Page 119 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions If the current master is not within the 1 µs accuracy, ALARM is set to TRUE. If the current master is not the saved primary master, WARNING is set to TRUE. The EXTCLKMSTR output indicates if the current master is external. Since the list is updated via the current primary master in the network, it is possible to lower the current grandmasters priority to a point where another clock takes the role and the priority value in the list for the original master is no longer updated.
Page 120: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.6.1.3 Signals Table 34: SNTP Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm status for clock synchronization TRUE if the connection to both primary and secondary SNTP servers has been lost. “ FALSE if the connection to the secondary SNTP server is detected.
Page 121 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 36: IRIG-B Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm status for clock synchronization TRUE if the signal has been lost for a minute. Otherwise FALSE. WARNING BOOLEAN Warning status for clock synchronization TRUE if the signal connection is lost.
Page 122: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.6.1.4 Settings Table 38: Time format Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS 1=24H:MM:SS:M Time format 2=12H:MM:SS:MS Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY 1=DD.MM.YYYY Date format 2=DD/MM/YYYY 3=DD-MM-YYYY 4=MM.DD.YYYY 5=MM/DD/YYYY 6=YYYY-MM-DD 7=YYYY-DD-MM 8=YYYY/DD/MM Table 39: Time settings Parameter Values (Range)
Page 123 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 42: Time settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description DST in use 0=False 1=True DST in use setting 1=True DST on time (hours) 0...23 Daylight saving time on, time (hh) DST on time (minutes) 0...59 Daylight saving time on, time (mm) DST on date (day)
Page 124: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.6.1.5 Monitored data Table 43: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Synch source Enum 0=Not defined Time 1=SNTP primary synchronization 2=SNTP source secondary 4=IEEE 1588 master 5=IEEE 1588 slave 7=IRIG-B 8=DNP 3.0 9=Modbus 17=IEC 60870-5-103...
Page 125: Generic Protection Control
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PTP gm identity String PTP grand master clock identity according PTP standard PTP gm time Src Enum 1=Atomic clock PTP grand master 2=GPS clock source type 3=Terrestrial radio 4=PTP 5=NTP 6=Hand set...
Page 126: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.7.2 Functionality Setting group control The protection relay supports six setting groups. Each setting group contains parameters categorized as group settings inside application functions. The customer can change the active setting group at run time. The active setting group can be changed by a parameter or via binary inputs depending on the mode selected with the Configuration/Setting Group/SG operation mode setting.
Page 127 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 46: SG operation mode = "Logic mode 2" Input BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE Setting group 1 can be copied to any other or all groups from HMI (Copy group 1). Test mode The function has two outputs, BEH_TST and BEH_BLK, which are activated in test mode according to...
Page 128: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Frequency adaptivity The FRQ_ADP_WARN output is active when full adaptation to the actual frequency is not reached or guaranteed. The FRQ_ADP_FAIL output is active when no frequency source has sufficient amplitude and the nominal frequency window size is used in measurements.
Page 129: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 50: PROTECTION Output signals Name Type Description SG_LOGIC_SEL BOOLEAN Logic selection for setting group SG_1_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active SG_2_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active SG_3_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active SG_4_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active...
Page 130: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.8.2 Functionality Local/Remote control is by default realized through the R/L button on the front panel. The control via binary input can be enabled by setting the value of the LR control setting to "Binary input". The binary input control requires that the CONTROL function is instantiated in the product configuration.
Page 131: Station Authority Level "L,R
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions IEC 61850 command originator category is always set by the IEC 61850 client. The relay supports station and remote IEC 61850 command originator categories, depending on the selected station authority level. 3.8.4 Station authority level “L,R” Relay's default station authority level is “L,R”.
Page 132: Station Authority Level "L,R,L+R
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.8.5 Station authority level “L,R,L+R” Station authority level “L,R, L+R” adds multilevel access support. Control access can also be simultaneously permitted from local or remote location. Simultaneous local or remote control operation is not allowed as one client and location at time can access controllable objects and they remain reserved until the previously started control operation is first completed by the client.
Page 133: Station Authority Level "L,S,R
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.8.6 Station authority level “L,S,R” Station authority level “L,S,R” adds station control access. In this level IEC 61850 command originator category validation is performed to distinguish control commands with IEC 61850 command originator category set to “Remote” or “Station”.
Page 134: Station Authority Level "L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 58: Station authority level “L,S,R” using CONTROL function block L/R Control L/R Control status Control access Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 IEC 61850 CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI client client CTRL_OFF FALSE FALSE CTRL_LOC...
Page 135: Control Mode
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 59: Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R” using R/L button L/R Control L/R Control status Control access R/L button CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 IEC 61850 CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI client client Local FALSE FALSE Remote FALSE TRUE...
Page 136: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions For more information, see the Test mode chapter in this manual. 3.8.9 Signals Table 62: CONTROL Input signals Name Type Default Description CTRL_OFF BOOLEAN Control input OFF CTRL_LOC BOOLEAN Control input Local CTRL_STA BOOLEAN Control input Station CTRL_REM BOOLEAN...
Page 137: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.8.11 Monitored data Table 65: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Command response Enum 0=No commands Latest command 1=Select open response 2=Select close 3=Operate open 4=Operate close 5=Direct open 6=Direct close 7=Cancel 8=Position reached 9=Position...
Page 138: Fault Recorder Fltrfrc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Fault recorder FLTRFRC 3.9.1 Function block GUID-206F1F0C-1D18-4E10-BE6E-823B0A80B93B V1 EN Figure 42: Function block 3.9.2 Functionality The protection relay has the capacity to store the records of the latest 128 fault events. Fault records include fundamental or RMS current values. The records enable the user to analyze recent power system events.
Page 139: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions If some functions in the relay application are sensitive to start frequently, it might be advisable to set the setting parameter Trig mode to "From operate". Then only faults that cause an operate event trigger a new fault recording.
Page 140: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 67: Special conditions Condition Description The function requires that at least one voltage U3P1 connected to real measurements channel is connected. The function requires that at least one voltage U3P2 connected to real measurements channel is connected.
Page 141: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.9.5 Settings Table 69: FLTRFRC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Trig mode 0=From all faults 0=From all faults Triggering mode 1=From operate 2=From only start Table 70:...
Page 142: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.9.6 Monitored data Table 71: FLTRFRC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Fault number INT32 0...999999 Fault record number Time and date Timestamp Fault record time stamp Protection (rec. set 1) Enum 0=None Protection function (rec.
Page 143 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 65=LSHDPFRQ 66=LSHDPFRQ 67=LSHDPFRQ 68=LSHDPFRQ 69=LSHDPFRQ 71=DPHLPDOC 72=DPHLPDOC 74=DPHHPDOC 77=MAPGAPC1 78=MAPGAPC2 79=MAPGAPC3 85=MNSPTOC1 86=MNSPTOC2 88=LOFLPTUC1 90=TR2PTDF1 91=LNPLDF1 92=LREFPNDF1 94=MPDIF1 96=HREFPDIF1 100=ROVPTOV 101=ROVPTOV 102=ROVPTOV 104=PHPTOV1 105=PHPTOV2 106=PHPTOV3 108=PHPTUV1 109=PHPTUV2 110=PHPTUV3 112=NSPTOV1 113=NSPTOV2 116=PSPTUV1...
Page 144 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -83=SPHPTOV4 -82=SPHPTOV3 -81=SPHPTOV2 -80=SPHPTOV1 -25=OEPVPH4 -24=OEPVPH3 -23=OEPVPH2 -22=OEPVPH1 -19=PSPTOV2 -18=PSPTOV1 -15=PREVPTOC -12=PHPTUC2 -11=PHPTUC1 -9=PHIZ1 5=PHLTPTOC1 20=EFLPTOC4 26=EFHPTOC5 27=EFHPTOC6 37=NSPTOC3 38=NSPTOC4 45=T1PTTR2 54=DEFHPDEF 75=DPHHPDOC 89=LOFLPTUC2 103=ROVPTOV 117=PSPTUV2 -13=PHPTUC3 3=PHLPTOC3 10=PHHPTOC5 11=PHHPTOC6 28=EFHPTOC7...
Page 145 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -99=MAPGAPC9 -98=RESCPSCH -57=FDEFLPDE -56=FDEFLPDE -54=FEFLPTOC -53=FDPHLPDO -52=FDPHLPDO -50=FPHLPTOC -47=FRPFRQ8 -46=FRPFRQ7 -45=MAPGAPC2 -44=MAPGAPC2 -43=MAPGAPC2 -42=MAPGAPC2 -41=MAPGAPC2 -40=MAPGAPC1 -37=HAEFPTOC -35=WPWDE3 -34=WPWDE2 -33=WPWDE1 52=DEFLPDEF3 84=MAPGAPC8 93=LREFPNDF2 97=HREFPDIF2 -117=XDEFLPD -116=XDEFLPD -115=SDPHLPD -114=SDPHLPD -113=XNSPTOC -112=XNSPTOC -111=XEFIPTOC...
Page 146 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -64=PHPVOC1 -63=H3EFPSEF -60=HCUBPTO -59=CUBPTOC1 -72=DOPPDPR1 -69=DUPPDPR1 -61=COLPTOC1 -106=MAPGAPC -105=MAPGAPC -104=MAPGAPC -103=MAPGAPC -76=MAPGAPC1 -75=MAPGAPC1 -62=SRCPTOC1 -74=DOPPDPR3 -73=DOPPDPR2 -70=DUPPDPR2 -58=UZPDIS1 -36=UEXPDIS1 14=MFADPSDE -10=LVRTPTUV -8=LVRTPTUV2 -6=LVRTPTUV3 -122=DPH3LPD -121=DPH3HPD -120=DPH3HPD -119=PH3LPTO -118=PH3LPTO -79=PH3HPTOC -78=PH3HPTOC -77=PH3IPTOC1...
Page 147 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 123=PHVPTOV1 39=DNSPDOC1 40=DNSPDOC2 -126=PHCPTOV -125=PHBPTOV -97=HIAPDIF3 -95=HICPDIF3 -94=HICPDIF2 -91=HIBPDIF3 -90=HIBPDIF2 -71=HIAPDIF2 -55=FRPFRQ12 -51=FRPFRQ11 -49=FRPFRQ10 -48=FRPFRQ9 -38=DSTPDIS1 -21=CUBPTOC3 -20=CUBPTOC2 -17=MPUPF2 -2=PHCPTUV1 -1=PHBPTUV1 4=PHIPTOC3 15=MFADPSDE 16=MFADPSDE 73=DPHLPDOC 76=DPHHPDOC 95=HCUBPTOC 99=MREFPTOC 124=PSPTUV4 125=PSPTOV4 127=JAMPTOC2...
Page 148 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Fault reactance FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 Fault reactance Active group INT32 1...6 Active setting group Shot pointer INT32 1...7 Autoreclosing shot pointer value Max diff current IL1:1 FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 Maximum phase A differential current (1) Max diff current IL2:1 FLOAT32...
Page 149 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Max current IL1:2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase A current (2) Max current IL2:2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase B current (2) Max current IL3:2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase C current (2) Max current Io:2 FLOAT32...
Page 150 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Voltage Zro-Seq:1 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Zero sequence voltage Voltage Ps-Seq:1 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Positive sequence voltage Voltage Ng-Seq:1 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Negative sequence voltage Voltage UL1:2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase A voltage (2) Voltage UL2:2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000...
Page 151: Nonvolatile Memory
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Frequency gradient:2 FLOAT32 -10.00...10.00 Hz/s Frequency gradient (2) Frequency:3 FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Frequency gradient (3) Frequency gradient:3 FLOAT32 -10.00...10.00 Hz/s Frequency gradient (3) Conductance Yo FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. Conductance Yo Susceptance Yo FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000.
Page 152: Analog Measurement Channels
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions • Up to 1024 events are stored. The stored events are visible in HMI and Event viewer tool in PCM600. • Recorded data • Fault records (up to 128) • Maximum demands • Circuit breaker condition monitoring •...
Page 153 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions correction factors are available for voltage and Rogowski sensors. The Amplitude correction factor is named Amplitude corr. A(B/C) and Angle correction factor is named Angle corr A(B/C). These correction factors can be found on the Sensor's rating plate. If the correction factors are not available, contact the sensor manufacturer for more information.
Page 154: Binary Inputs
The same applies for the VT connection parameter which is always set to “WYE” type. The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is most often 10000:1. Thus, the Division ratio parameter is usually set to “10000”. The primary voltage is proportionally divided by this division ratio.
Page 155: Binary Input Threshold Voltage
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions The pulse counter input is enabled by setting the parameter Input 14 counter-mode in Configuration/I/O modules/Slot #/Input filtering. When enabled, the pulse counter input has dedicated Input counter threshold voltage and Input counter threshold hysteresis settings.
Page 156: Binary Input Inversion
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-74E0D03C-B25C-462F-B910-8A51778D017E V1 EN Figure 43: Binary input filtering 3 Input signal 4 Filtered input signal 5 Filter time At the beginning, the input signal is at the high state, the short low state is filtered and no input state change is detected.
Page 157: Oscillation Suppression
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions When a binary input is inverted, the state of the input is TRUE (1) when no control voltage is applied to its terminals. Accordingly, the input state is FALSE (0) when a control voltage is applied to the terminals of the binary input. 3.13.5 Oscillation suppression Oscillation suppression is used to reduce the load from the system when a binary input...
Page 158: Power Output Contacts
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions can also be used to energize an external trip relay, which in turn can be configured to energize the breaker trip or close coils. Using an external trip relay can require an external trip circuit supervision relay.
Page 159: Double-Pole Power Outputs Podp1, Podp2 And Podp3 With Trip Circuit Supervision
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.14.1.2 Double-pole power outputs PODP1, PODP2 and PODP3 with trip circuit supervision The power outputs PODP1, PODP2 and PODP3 are double-pole normally open/form A power outputs with trip circuit supervision. The trip circuit supervision hardware includes constant current generator to provide trip circuit supervision (TCS) current and TCS input that can be connected to the TCS function with Application Configuration in PCM600.
Page 160: Static Power Outputs Spo1
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.14.1.3 Static power outputs SPO1...SPO8 The outputs are normally used in applications that require fast relay output contact activation time to achieve fast opening of a breaker, such as, arc-protection or breaker failure protection, where fast operation is required either to minimize fault effects to the equipment or to avoid a fault to expand to a larger area.
Page 161: Signal Output Contacts
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-5203F81B-35CD-4FC5-8DBC-35C08DD5F114 V2 EN Figure 46: Static power outputs SPO1...SPO8 3.14.2 Signal output contacts Signal output contacts are single-pole, single (normally open/form A or change-over/ form C) signal output contacts (SO1, SO2, ...) or parallel connected dual contacts. The signal output contacts are used for energizing, for example, external low burden trip relays, auxiliary relays, annunciators and LEDs.
Page 162 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions A single signal contact is rated for a continuous current of 5 A. It has a make and carry for 0.5 seconds at 15 A. When two contacts are connected in parallel, the relay is of a different design. It has the make and carry rating of 30 A for 0.5 seconds.
Page 163: Internal Fault Signal Output Irf
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-2DCD8174-EE3A-4857-8A72-63E6F08B79E4 V1 EN Figure 48: Signal outputs in BIO1001 and BIO1003 modules 3.14.2.1 Internal fault signal output IRF The internal fault signal output (change-over/form C) IRF is a single contact included in the power supply module of the protection relay in slot G. REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 164: Rtd/Ma Inputs/Ma Outputs
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-064DAA79-B069-4CAF-B05C-4ACD3B8974A8 V2 EN Figure 49: Internal fault signal output IRF 3.15 RTD/mA inputs/mA outputs 3.15.1 Function blocks GUID-6DE23710-21B6-4B8D-98B6-09B1BDEBDEC9 V1 EN Figure 50: Function block for mA channel GUID-3F5B483B-0ABC-4EF7-BF37-7E307806106E V1 EN Figure 51: Function block for RTD channel 3.15.2 Functionality The Slot#-mA#/RTD# function is an interface function between the relay's mA/RTD...
Page 165: Operation Principle
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Both function blocks have limit supervision alarm outputs and an output for sensor fault. 3.15.3 Operation principle The operation of Slot#-mA#/RTD# can be described with a module diagram that illustrates a single input-output combination of the actual function block. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 166: Input Mode
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions All the channels are independent mA/RTD channels with separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and isolation. Thus, the RTD group is isolated from mA channels. The RTD inputs measure resistance in the range of 0...4000 Ω. All inputs are calibrated and the calibration factors are stored on the module in nonvolatile memory.
Page 167 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions "Dimensionless". The Input minimum, Input maximum, Value maximum and Value minimum settings have to be adjusted according to the input channel and if Value unit is changed. When the RTD channel input is used for the temperature sensor type, the Value unit setting needs to be changed to "Degrees Celsius".
Page 168 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Temp Platinum TCR 0.00385 Nickel TCR 0.00618 °C Pt 100 Pt 250 Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 250 138.51 346.26 161.78 194.13 404.45 142.29 355.73 168.79 202.55 421.97 146.07 365.17 175.97 211.17 439.93 149.83 374.58 183.33 220.00...
Page 169: Output Mode
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions When necessary, the valid measuring range may be narrower than the default of the selected measuring range. A narrower range can be defined with the Value minimum and Value maximum settings. 3.15.3.2 Output mode A measurement value from another function, mA input or RTD input can be represented by the mA output.
Page 170 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions AI_VAL 200 °C Value unit ”Degrees celsius” -40 °C Input Input mode ”Pt100” GUID-4F9447F5-A007-431C-93F5-7A779ABFB330 V1 EN Figure 54: Pt100 scaling function Scaling example 2 Input mode is set to -20...20 mA that is used for tap position information fed from the tap changer.
Page 171: Limit Value Supervision
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions "100". These settings allow the input values to be scaled as a ratio of the resistance range. AI_VAL Value maximum Value unit ”Dimensionless” Value minimum Input Input mode 100Ω 1600Ω ”Resistance” Input minimum Input maximum GUID-CA5681A0-CD3D-4DC9-A961-CD5D0C9D9B43 V1 EN Figure 56: Output as a ratio of the resistance range...
Page 172: Deadband Supervision
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 86: Pre-defined hysteresis values based on Value unit Value unit Hysteresis Dimensionless Based on the scaling function Ampere 0.1 mA Degrees Celsius 0.5°C 2 Ω 1) When the input is scaled to the "Dimensionless" output, the additional hysteresis is added the initial table value.
Page 173 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Value maximum and Value minimum affect the scaled output range. The range of the scaled input is defined with the settings Input minimum and Input maximum. Depending on setting Num of knee points, the output can be scaled with up to five linear curves.
Page 174 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Example 2: mA input to mA output Slot# – mA1 AO_VAL AI_VAL HIGH_ALARM HIGH_WARN LOW_WARN LOW_ALARM Slot# – mA2 AO_VAL AI_VAL HIGH_ALARM HIGH_WARN LOW_WARN LOW_ALARM GUID-7EDEF43D-037C-4A3C-A0E2-5624BABBC8E0 V1 EN Figure 60: Application example for mA input to mA output mA current is measured at channel 1.
Page 175: Rtd/Ma Input/Ma Output Connection
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Slot# – mA1 AO_VAL AI_VAL HIGH_ALARM HIGH_WARN LOW_WARN LOW_ALARM Slot# – RTD 7 AI_VAL HIGH_ALARM HIGH_WARN LOW_WARN LOW_ALARM SENSOR_FLT GUID-E6B59AA5-B76A-43B8-92C2-B067DFD43422 V1 EN Figure 62: Application example for RTD input to mA output Output [mA] Value maximum 20 Value knee point 4 Value knee point 3...
Page 176 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions sensor are symmetrical, that is, the wires are of the same type and length. Thus the wire resistance is automatically compensated. GUID-F212B828-2C12-462B-9520-77F19B838382 V1 EN Figure 64: Four RTD/resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire connection REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 177 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-3B9A89D9-0674-4803-BD90-9F05295FB2F7 V1 EN Figure 65: Four RTD/resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection GUID-CFD55A71-94C2-4B28-B9D3-41871E57AEDC V1 EN Figure 66: mA channels working as mA inputs REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 178: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-0708A88A-64E7-407D-986F-8364E55A6534 V1 EN Figure 67: mA channels working as mA outputs 3.15.6 Signals Table 87: mA1 Input signals Name Type Default Description mA output, Connector AO_VAL FLOAT32 A pins 1-2, instantaneous value Table 88: mA2 Input signals Name Type...
Page 179 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 92: RTD2 Output signals Name Type Description RTD input, Connector A pins AI_VAL FLOAT32 10-11-12c, instantaneous value SENSOR_FLT BOOLEAN Sensor fault Table 93: RTD3 Output signals Name Type Description RTD input, Connector A pins AI_VAL FLOAT32 13-14-15c, instantaneous value...
Page 180: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 99: RTD9 Output signals Name Type Description RTD input, Connector B pins AI_VAL FLOAT32 13-14-15c, instantaneous value SENSOR_FLT BOOLEAN Sensor fault Table 100: RTD10 Output signals Name Type Description RTD input, Connector B pins AI_VAL FLOAT32 16-17-18c, instantaneous value...
Page 181 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Value high limit -10000.0...10000.0 10000 Output value high warning limit for supervision Value low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000 Output value low warning limit for supervision Value low low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000 Output value low...
Page 182 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Value low low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000 Output value low alarm limit for supervision Value deadband 100...100000 1000 Deadband configuration value for integral calculation. (percentage of difference between min and max as 0,001 % s) Update interval...
Page 183: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.15.8 Monitored data Table 105: mA1 Monitored data IEC name Type Values (Range) Unit Description mA input 1, AI_RANGE Enum Connector A pins 1-2, range mA input 1, Connector A pins AI_DB FLOAT32 1-2, reported value Table 106: mA2 Monitored data...
Page 184 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 109: RTD3 Monitored data IEC name Type Values (Range) Unit Description RTD input 3, AI_RANGE Enum Connector A pins 13-14-15c, range RTD input 3, Connector A pins AI_DB FLOAT32 13-14-15c, reported value Table 110: RTD4 Monitored data IEC name Type...
Page 185: Smv Function Blocks
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 114: RTD8 Monitored data IEC name Type Values (Range) Unit Description RTD input 8, AI_RANGE Enum Connector B pins 10-11-12c, range RTD input 8, Connector B pins AI_DB FLOAT32 10-11-12c, reported value Table 115: RTD9 Monitored data IEC name Type...
Page 186: Smv Stream Sender (Iec 61850-9-2Le) Smvsender
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.16.1 SMV stream sender (IEC 61850-9-2LE) SMVSENDER 3.16.1.1 Function block GUID-BE43AAAD-DF4C-49D9-AE8D-4A49CDF8FB3B V1 EN Figure 68: Function block 3.16.1.2 Functionality The SMV stream sender (IEC 61850-9-2LE) function SMVSENDER is used for activating the SMV sending functionality. It adds/removes the sampled value control block and the related data set into/from the sending device's configuration.
Page 187: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.16.2.2 Functionality The SMV stream receiver (IEC 61850-9-2LE) function SMVRCV is used for connecting SMV channels to the application. 3.16.2.3 Signals Table 118: SMVRCV Output signals Name Type Description INT32-UL1 IEC61850-9-2 phase 1 voltage INT32-UL2 IEC61850-9-2 phase 2 voltage INT32-UL3...
Page 188 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions current and positive- and negative-sequence current. The output IRES_CLC can be connected to functions using the calculated residual current. The current transducer selection can be made by setting Current input type to "Current trafo" for conventional CT sensor or to "Current sensor" for current sensor type. The sensor's or the CT's primary rated current can be set using Primary current setting.
Page 189: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 119: Frequency adaptivity setting for three-phase current measurement Setting value Description Disable Frequency adaptive measurements are disabled for this ILTCTR. Measurements are fixed to nominal frequency defined with Configuration/ System/Rated frequency. Enable Frequency adaptive measurements are enabled. In this case, the estimated network frequency is defined by another preprocessing block.
Page 190: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Description IL3_DR SIGNAL Phase current IL3 for disturbance recorder NPS_DR SIGNAL Negative sequence current for disturbance recorder PPS_DR SIGNAL Positive sequence current for disturbance recorder 3.17.1.5 Settings Table 122: ILTCTR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 191: Residual Current Preprocessing Restctr
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.17.2 Residual current preprocessing RESTCTR 3.17.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Residual current preprocessing RESTCTR RESTCTR RESTCTR 3.17.2.2 Function block GUID-992D312D-50B2-415F-B3DE-A5739EF9C5B8 V1 EN Figure 71: Function block 3.17.2.3 Functionality The residual current preprocessing function RESTCTR is used for setting up the...
Page 192: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions The SMV Max Delay setting defines how long the receiver waits for the SMV frames before activating the ALARM output. This setting can be accessed via Configuration/ System. Waiting for the SMV frames also delays the local measurements of the receiver to keep them correctly time aligned.
Page 193: Phase And Residual Voltage Preprocessing Utvtr
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.17.3 Phase and residual voltage preprocessing UTVTR 3.17.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Phase and residual voltage UTVTR UTVTR UTVTR preprocessing 3.17.3.2 Function block GUID-615F9CAA-66C6-4906-A438-2E0CA3C31228 V2 EN Figure 72: Function block 3.17.3.3...
Page 194 This is used as a reference to scale the measurements accordingly. Division ratio setting defines the ratio for sensor use. The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is typically 10000:1. Thus, the Division ratio setting is usually set to "10000". For more...
Page 195 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions signal receives information about the MCB open state. When MINCB_OPEN is active, the outputs ALARM and WARNING are activated. The MCB open state does not affect IEC 61850-9-2 sampled value quality information. The WARNING and URES_WARNING outputs in the receiver are activated if the synchronization accuracy of the sender or the receiver is worse than 4 μs.
Page 196: Residual Voltage Scaling
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions All three phases must to be connected if the main or backup frequency source is selected. Frequency adaptive measurements for residual voltage can be activated with the setting Frequency adaptivity. Two selections are provided. Table 127: Frequency adaptivity setting for residual voltage measurement Setting value...
Page 197: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions In this case, ROVPTOV1 and ROVPTOV2 in Figure 74 can both use the same U reference level in their settings. URES_CLC and URES_MEAS in Figure 73 are scaled to the same level. ROVPTOV1 URES OPERATE UTVTR1[1]_URES_CLC ROVPTOV1[1]_OPERATE...
Page 198: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Description NPS_DR SIGNAL Negative sequence current for disturbance recorder PPS_DR SIGNAL Positive sequence current for disturbance recorder FREQ_DR SIGNAL Measured frequency for disturbance recorder 3.17.3.6 Settings Table 130: UTVTR (3U) Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 199: Goose Function Blocks
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 132: UTVTR (Uo) Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Primary voltage 0.100...440.000 0.001 11.547 Primary voltage Secondary voltage 57...240 Secondary voltage Amplitude Corr 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Amplitude correction Angle correction -20.0000...20.0000 0.0001...
Page 200: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.18.1.2 Functionality The received GOOSE binary information function GOOSERCV_BIN is used to connect the GOOSE binary inputs to the application. 3.18.1.3 Signals Table 134: GOOSERCV_BIN Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal Table 135: GOOSERCV_BIN Output signals Name...
Page 201: Received Goose Measured Value Information Goosercv_Mv
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.18.3 Received GOOSE measured value information GOOSERCV_MV 3.18.3.1 Function block GUID-B1E801F1-DCAF-4ECB-A50E-366F08FCB714 V1 EN Figure 77: Function block 3.18.3.2 Functionality The received GOOSE measured value information function GOOSERCV_MV is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to the application. 3.18.3.3 Signals Table 138:...
Page 202: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.18.4.2 Functionality The received GOOSE 8-bit integer value information function GOOSERCV_INT8 is used to connect the GOOSE 8-bit integer inputs to the application. 3.18.4.3 Signals Table 140: GOOSERCV_INT8 Input signals Name Type Default Description INT8 Input signal Table 141:...
Page 203: Received Goose Interlocking Information Goosercv_Intl
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.18.6 Received GOOSE interlocking information GOOSERCV_INTL 3.18.6.1 Function block GUID-EFA94662-CF1C-4A1E-ABA8-52238A6FD227 V1 EN Figure 80: Function block 3.18.6.2 Functionality The received GOOSE interlocking information function GOOSERCV_INTL is used to connect the GOOSE double binary input to the application and extracting single binary position signals from the double binary position signal.
Page 204: Received Goose Measured Value (Phasor) Information Goosercv_Cmv
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.18.7 Received GOOSE measured value (phasor) information GOOSERCV_CMV 3.18.7.1 Function block GUID-10CDED37-2AF9-4601-8054-DF96DB0C3085 V1 EN Figure 81: Function block 3.18.7.2 Functionality The received GOOSE measured value (phasor) information function GOOSERCV_CMV is used to connect GOOSE measured value inputs to the application.
Page 205: Received Goose Enumerator Value Information Goosercv_Enum
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.18.8 Received GOOSE enumerator value information GOOSERCV_ENUM 3.18.8.1 Function block GUID-C914D20A-06AD-40E4-8ADC-5EE454BFADB3 V1 EN Figure 82: Function block 3.18.8.2 Functionality The received GOOSE enumerator value information function GOOSERCV_ENUM is used to connect GOOSE enumerator inputs to the application. 3.18.8.3 Signals Table 148:...
Page 206: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.1.2 Functionality The good signal quality function QTY_GOOD evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal for the application. The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (except preprocessing block).
Page 207: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.2.3 Signals Table 152: QTY_BAD Input signals Name Type Default Description Input signal Table 153: QTY_BAD Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal 3.19.3 GOOSE communication quality QTY_GOOSE_COMM 3.19.3.1 Function block GUID-338D1150-4CF5-4765-A48F-F661E093AB96 V1 EN Figure 85: Function block 3.19.3.2...
Page 208: Goose Data Health T_Health
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.4 GOOSE data health T_HEALTH 3.19.4.1 Function block GUID-90EEEA26-B2B2-413E-8929-D53010D4E3A0 V1 EN Figure 86: Function block 3.19.4.2 Functionality The GOOSE data health function T_HEALTH evaluates enumerated data of “Health” data attribute. This function block can only be used with GOOSE. The IN input can be connected to GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is receiving the LD0.LLN0.Health.stVal data attribute sent by another device.
Page 209: Fault Direction Evaluation T_Dir
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.5 Fault direction evaluation T_DIR 3.19.5.1 Function block GUID-8A666B4F-C3DD-432D-A0EB-F455851D6594 V1 EN Figure 87: Function block 3.19.5.2 Functionality The fault direction evaluation function T_DIR evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR data attribute of the directional functions. T_DIR can only be used with GOOSE.
Page 210: Enumerator To Boolean Conversion T_Tcmd
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.6 Enumerator to boolean conversion T_TCMD 3.19.6.1 Function block GUID-572CFE0A-5ECC-4031-B308-6C03858C69A7 V1 EN Figure 88: Function block 3.19.6.2 Functionality The enumerator to boolean conversion function T_TCMD is used to convert enumerated input signals to boolean output signals. Table 160: Conversion from enumerated to boolean RAISE...
Page 211: 32-Bit Integer To Binary Command Conversion T_Tcmd_Bin
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.7 32-bit integer to binary command conversion T_TCMD_BIN 3.19.7.1 Function block GUID-0248BEF0-99EE-4837-B14D-5A309F0ED240 V1 EN Figure 89: Function block 3.19.7.2 Functionality The 32-bit integer to binary command conversion function T_TCMD_BIN is used to convert 32 bit integer input signal to boolean output signals. Table 163: Conversion from integer to boolean RAISE...
Page 212: Binary Command To 32-Bit Integer Conversion T_Bin_Tcmd
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.8 Binary command to 32-bit integer conversion T_BIN_TCMD 3.19.8.1 Function block GUID-455FF6A9-387F-48E6-AB63-056EEA64675D V1 EN Figure 90: Function block 3.19.8.2 Functionality The binary command to 32-bit integer conversion function T_BIN_TCMD is used to convert boolean input signals to 32 bit integer output signals. Table 166: Conversion from boolean to integer RAISE...
Page 213: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.9.2 Functionality The integer 32-bit to real conversion function T_I32_TO_R converts a 32-bit integer to a real value. The output quality follows the input quality information. If the integer value is greater than 2097151, then the real value is set to 2097151 and the output quality is set as bad.
Page 214: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.10.3 Signals Table 171: T_R_TO_I8 Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN FLOAT32 Real input value Table 172: T_R_TO_I8 Output signals Name Type Description INT8_OUT INT8 Integer output value 3.19.11 Real to integer 32-bit conversion T_R_TO_I32 3.19.11.1 Function block GUID-95D040B4-223F-4DBF-ADE6-7C3CB7B18DE4 V1 EN...
Page 215: Integer 32-Bit Switch Selector Switchi32
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.12 Integer 32-bit switch selector SWITCHI32 3.19.12.1 Function block GUID-B52E02F4-08EA-4B45-84F1-92B8F47F6A68 V1 EN Figure 94: Function block 3.19.12.2 Functionality The integer 32-bit switch selector function SWITCHI32 is operated by the CTL_SW input, which selects the output value INT32_OUT between the INT32_IN1 and INT32_IN2 inputs.
Page 216: Integer 32-Bit To Boolean Conversion T_I32_To_B16
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.19.13 Integer 32-bit to boolean conversion T_I32_TO_B16 3.19.13.1 Function block GUID-943C173F-3AC0-4C46-A96F-0657E442860D V1 EN Figure 95: Function block 3.19.13.2 Functionality The integer 32-bit to boolean conversion function T_I32_TO_B16 is used to transform an integer input INT32_IN into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals OUT1… OUT16.
Page 217: Boolean To Integer 32-Bit Conversion T_B16_To_I32
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Description OUT8 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Boolean output value 13 OUT14...
Page 218: Configurable Logic Blocks
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 5 BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 6 BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 7 BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 8 BOOLEAN 0 (FALSE) Boolean input value 9 IN10 BOOLEAN...
Page 219: Minimum Pulse Timer Second Resolution, Two Channels Tpsgapc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the input is activated, the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting. Both timers use the same setting parameter. GUID-B744FA36-0C8F-42B5-8237-503FE49C80C2 V1 EN Figure 98: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is...
Page 220 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Function block GUID-CF4909ED-D729-4231-BFBA-0733FAA6098B V1 EN Figure 99: Function block Functionality The minimum pulse timer second resolution, two channels, function TPSGAPC contains two independent timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in seconds). The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs.
Page 221: Minimum Pulse Timer Minutes Resolution, Two Channels Tpmgapc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.1.3 Minimum pulse timer minutes resolution, two channels TPMGAPC Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Minimum pulse timer minutes resolution, TPMGAPC 62TPM two channels Function block GUID-4FEAD2CF-C643-4B87-ABAF-B9867B01747E V1 EN Figure 101: Function block Functionality...
Page 222: Pulse Timer, Eight Channels Ptgapc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Settings Table 190: TPMGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 0...300 Minimum pulse time 3.20.2 Pulse timer, eight channels PTGAPC 3.20.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification...
Page 223: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.2.4 Signals Table 191: PTGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status...
Page 224: Technical Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.2.6 Technical data Table 194: PTGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 3.20.3 Daily timer DTMGAPC 3.20.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number...
Page 225: Application
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Time comparator This module compares the current day and time with the activation hour and minute defined with the settings xxx Act hour and xxx Act Mn, respectively. When the time of the day reaches the set activation time, output Q is activated and remains active for the duration defined by the setting xxx off delay.
Page 226: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 196: DTMGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output status 3.20.3.7 Settings Table 197: DTMGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Monday Act enable 0=False...
Page 227: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Sunday Act hour 0...23 Activation hour time for Sunday Sunday Act Mn 0...59 Activation minute time for Sunday Sunday off delay 1...1440 Activation duration for Sunday 3.20.3.8 Monitored data Table 198: DTMGAPC Monitored data...
Page 228 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions BLOCK Date comparator FREEZE GUID-70EB7E59-AB19-4E01-A300-E3DC2440603E V1 EN Figure 109: Functional module diagram Date comparator This module compares the current date (excluding the calendar year) with the set activation and deactivation date and month settings. If the system date and month are the same or greater than Activation day and Activation month settings, output Q is activated and remains active till the date reaches the set Deactivation day and Deactivation month settings.
Page 229: Application
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.4.5 Application The function activates an output for a specific set duration of the calendar year. Consider an application where the output of the daily timer function DTMGAPC needs to be activated only for specific days of the calendar year. The output of CALGAPC can be connected to the BLOCK input of DTMGAPC (using NOT gate) so that DTMGAPC activates only for the duration defined by CALGAPC.
Page 230: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.4.7 Settings Table 201: CALGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Activation day 1...31 Activation day Activation month 1=January 1=January Activation month 2=February 3=March 4=April...
Page 231: Function Block
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.5.2 Function block GUID-CAF7F1AD-95FA-4260-A80A-92D1765B2557 V1 EN Figure 112: Function block 3.20.5.3 Functionality The time delay off, eight channels, function TOFGAPC can be used, for example, for a drop-off-delayed output related to the input signal. The function contains eight independent timers.
Page 232: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 204: TOFGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 status BOOLEAN Output 2 status BOOLEAN Output 3 status BOOLEAN Output 4 status BOOLEAN Output 5 status BOOLEAN Output 6 status BOOLEAN Output 7 status BOOLEAN Output 8 status 3.20.5.5...
Page 233: Function Block
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.6.2 Function block GUID-92554B6C-64AD-4FA6-82A6-E685A8B1411F V1 EN Figure 114: Function block 3.20.6.3 Functionality The time delay on, eight channels, function TONGAPC can be used, for example, for time-delaying the output related to the input signal. TONGAPC contains eight independent timers.
Page 234: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 208: TONGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 BOOLEAN Output 2 BOOLEAN Output 3 BOOLEAN Output 4 BOOLEAN Output 5 BOOLEAN Output 6 BOOLEAN Output 7 BOOLEAN Output 8 3.20.6.5 Settings Table 209: TONGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter...
Page 235: Function Block
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.7.2 Function block GUID-BCA474B6-984C-4407-B781-5B97F8CAEA95 V1 EN Figure 116: Function block 3.20.7.3 Functionality The SR flip-flop, eight channels, nonvolatile function SRGAPC is a simple SR flip- flop with a memory that can be set or that can reset an output from the S# or R# inputs, respectively.
Page 236: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q4 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q5 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q5 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q6 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q6 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 237: Boolean Value Event Creation Mvgapc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.8 Boolean value event creation MVGAPC 3.20.8.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Boolean value event creation MVGAPC 3.20.8.2 Function block GUID-DA5B1858-7FB8-48BA-B762-B737E553AEA8 V1 EN Figure 117: Function block 3.20.8.3 Functionality The boolean value event creation function MVGAPC is used for user logic bits.
Page 238: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 216: MVGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Q1 status BOOLEAN Q2 status BOOLEAN Q3 status BOOLEAN Q4 status BOOLEAN Q5 status BOOLEAN Q6 status BOOLEAN Q7 status BOOLEAN Q8 status 3.20.8.5 Settings Table 217: MVGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter...
Page 239: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.9.3 Functionality The integer value event creation function MVI4GAPC is used for creation of the events from the integer values. The integer input value is received via IN1...4 input. The integer output value is available on OUT1...4 output. The integer input range is from -2147483648 to 2147483647.
Page 240: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.10.3 Functionality The analog value event creation with scaling function SCA4GAPC is used for scaling the analog value. It allows creating events from analog values. The analog value received via the AIn_VALUE input is scaled with the Scale ratio n setting.
Page 241: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.10.5 Settings Table 222: SCA4GAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Scale ratio 1 0.001...1000.000 0.001 1.000 Scale ratio for analog value 1 Scale ratio 2 0.001...1000.000 0.001 1.000 Scale ratio for analog value 2 Scale ratio 3 0.001...1000.000...
Page 242: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.11.4 Signals Table 223: SETRGAPC Output signals Name Type Description AO1_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 1 AO2_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 2 AO3_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 3 AO4_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 4 AO5_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 5 AO6_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 6...
Page 243: 16 Settable 32-Bit Integer Values Seti32Gapc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions IEC name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description -2000000.000...200 Set value for analog Set value 10 0.001 0000.000 value 10 -2000000.000...200 Set value for analog Set value 11 0.001 0000.000 value 11 -2000000.000...200 Set value for analog Set value 12 0.001 0000.000...
Page 244: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.12.4 Signals Table 225: SETI32GAPC Output signals Name Type Description IO1_VALUE INT32 Integer value 1 IO2_VALUE INT32 Integer value 2 IO3_VALUE INT32 Integer value 3 IO4_VALUE INT32 Integer value 4 IO5_VALUE INT32 Integer value 5 IO6_VALUE INT32 Integer value 6...
Page 245: Generic Control Points Spcgapc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions IEC name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description -2147483648...2147 Set value for integer Set value 10 483647 value 10 -2147483648...2147 Set value for integer Set value 11 483647 value 11 -2147483648...2147 Set value for integer Set value 12 483647 value 12...
Page 246 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions rising edge of the input signal is interpreted as a control request, and the output operation is triggered. When remote control requests are used the control points behaves as persistent. The Loc Rem restriction setting is used for enabling or disabling the restriction for SPCGAPC to follow the R/L button state.
Page 247: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.13.4 Signals Table 227: SPCGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 3...
Page 248: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.13.5 Settings Table 229: SPCGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Loc Rem restriction 0=False 1=True Local remote switch restriction 1=True Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle/ Persistent -1=Off...
Page 249 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Generic control point description Output 7 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle/ Persistent -1=Off...
Page 250: Pulse Counter For Energy Measurement Pcgapc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Description SPCGAPC1 Generic control point description Output 14 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle/ Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Generic control point description...
Page 251: Operation Principle
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions The pulses are captured by the binary input module and read by PCGAPC with a frequency of up to 40 Hz. PCGAPC can also be used as a general-purpose counter. 3.20.14.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on"...
Page 252 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions COUNT_VALUE activation, READ_VALUE also activates output VALUE_READ for 200 ms. The activation of RESET resets COUNT_VALUE to zero. Activation of FREEZE_COUNT freezes further counting. Changing Count criteria does not reset COUNT_VALUE. Scaling This module scales the count value available at COUNT_VALUE. The scaling depends on the Unit selection setting.
Page 253 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions SCALED_VALUE, the READ_VALUE activation also activates output VALUE_READ for 200 ms. Activation of FREEZE_COUNT input immediately updates SCALED_VALUE output with a pulse at VALUE_READ output. Output COUNT_SAT activates when either SCALED_VALUE or COUNT_VALUE exceeds the count range and it is not possible to count further. Figure 126 Figure 127 explain PCGAPC operation.
Page 254: Application
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions PULSE_INPUT Reporting time Reporting time Reporting time Reporting time Internal counter COUNT_VALUE FREEZE_COUNT READ_VALUE VALUE_READ Fixed pulse of 200ms SCALED_VALUE Unit selection set to Count Pulse quantity set to 10 GUID-D523E777-80BC-4255-9B5E-CFF2F5563D74 V2 EN Figure 127: Behavior of FREEZE_COUNT input 3.20.14.5 Application...
Page 255: Hotline Tag Hltgapc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Station HMI Communication 1234567890 channel PCGGIO Energy meter PULSE_INPUT VALUE_READ READ_VALUE COUNT_SAT RESET Impulse ratio = FREEZE_COUNT 10 impulses/MWh Unit selection = Active Energy Impulse ratio = 10 Impulse ratio prefix = Mega GUID-426F3489-F4A3-4498-9BBA-D97FA0757003 V1 EN Figure 128: Typical application of PCGAPC PCGAPC can also be used as a general-purpose counter.
Page 256: Operation Principle
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.15.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on" and "off". When the Operation setting is changed from "off" to "on", the monitored variable TAG_SOURCE is set to “None” and saved to a nonvolatile memory.
Page 257: Application
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions If a rising edge tag is detected remotely, and the status of the nonvolatile variable TAG_SOURCE is “None”, the tag is remotely activated. TAG_SOURCE changes to “Remote” while TAG_ON is set to TRUE and TAG_OFF to FALSE. If a rising edge tag is detected remotely, and the status of TAG_SOURCE is “Remote”, the tag is remotely deactivated.
Page 258: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 232: HLTGAPC Output signals Name Type Description TAG_ON BOOLEAN Hotline tag active TAG_OFF BOOLEAN Hotline tag is not active 3.20.15.7 Settings Table 233: HLTGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation...
Page 259: Function Block
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.16.2 Function block GUID-75455BDF-A38E-411B-A6C2-636433C7D749 V1 EN Figure 131: Function block 3.20.16.3 Functionality The voltage switch function VMSWI performs the switching function between up to four voltage groups (Bus1, Bus 2, Bus 3 and Bus 4). Residual voltage input can be optional and depends of the application configuration.
Page 260: Operation Principle
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 236: Special conditions Condition Description U3P1/U3P2/U3P3/U3P4 connected to real The function requires that at least one voltage channel is connected. measurements URES1/URES2/URES3/URES4 calculated The function requires that all three voltage...
Page 261: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Outputs WARNING and URES_WARNING indicate questionable quality data of system measurements for selected U3P and URES, respectively. Depending on the connected U3P channels to the voltage switch, the Primary voltage settings between the source U3P must match. Respectively, depending on the connected URES channels, the Primary voltage settings between the source URES must match.
Page 262: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.16.7 Monitored data Table 240: VMSWI Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description SWITCH_POS Enum 1=Source 1 Switch position 2=Source 2 3=Source 3 4=Source 4 3.20.17 Current switch CMSWI 3.20.17.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2...
Page 263: Operation Principle
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 241: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents I3P1 Three-phase currents I3P2 Three-phase currents I3P3 Three-phase currents I3P4 Residual current (measured or calculated) IRES1 Residual current (measured or calculated) IRES2 Residual current (measured or calculated) IRES3 Residual current (measured or calculated) IRES4...
Page 264: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions If the numbers of channels connected to I3P1...I3P4 and IRES1...IRES4 does not match with the number of connected SWITCH_TOx inputs, the configuration of the function fails. Outputs ALARM and IRES_ALARM indicate bad quality data of system measurements for selected I3P and IRES, respectively.
Page 265: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm WARNING BOOLEAN Warning 3.20.17.7 Monitored data Table 245: CMSWI Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description SWITCH_POS Enum 1=Source 1 Switch position 2=Source 2 3=Source 3 4=Source 4 3.20.18...
Page 266: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions The operation of UDFCNT can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. GUID-1E8AE6FE-A714-4024-82AE-4782635BCCAD V1 EN Figure 134: Functional module diagram Up-down counter Each rising edge of the UP_CNT input increments the counter value CNT_VAL by one and each rising edge of the DOWN_CNT input decrements the CNT_VAL by one.
Page 267: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 247: UDFCNT Output signals Name Type Description UPCNT_STS BOOLEAN Status of the up counting DNCNT_STS BOOLEAN Status of the down counting 3.20.18.6 Settings Table 248: UDFCNT Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default...
Page 268: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.19.3 Functionality The current sum function CMSUM is a phase-by-phase specific summing function for two current triplets. Output I3P can be used as normal current input for the application functions using current. Different measurement modes (DFT, RMS, Peak- to-peak) are supported.
Page 269: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.19.5 Signals Table 251: CMSUM Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P1 SIGNAL Three-phase currents 1 I3P2 SIGNAL Three-phase currents 2 Table 252: CMSUM Output signals Name Type Description SIGNAL Summed three-phase currents IRES SIGNAL Calculated residual current of summed three-phase currents...
Page 270: Application
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.20.5 Application See the application example in Figure 138. GUID-661AF64B-2EEC-4F06-AC21-D0501A994921 V1 EN Figure 138: Application example 3.20.20.6 Signals Table 253: OLGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description TR_TAP_POS INT32 Integer value representing tap changer position of transformer TR_I_AMPL FLOAT32...
Page 271: Function Block
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.21.2 Function block GUID-36FC9005-D90B-42BA-A1CA-03701C7ABA9F V1 EN Figure 139: Function block 3.20.21.3 Functionality Controllable gate function GATEGAPC can pass each input IN1...IN8 to output Q1...Q8 depending on the related setting Connect INx to Qx. Additionally, each output Qx can be named with Description setting.
Page 272: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.20.21.5 Settings Table 257: GATEGAPC Settings Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description Connect IN1 to Q1 1=On 0=Off IN1 to Q1 0=Off connection Description GATEGAPC1 Q1 Output description Connect IN2 to Q2 1=On 0=Off IN2 to Q2 0=Off connection...
Page 273: Standard Logic Operators
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.21 Standard logic operators 3.21.1 OR gate with two inputs OR, six inputs OR6 and twenty inputs OR20 3.21.1.1 Function block GUID-045BF6FB-703C-4D57-BD5D-A2D3E9AB4728 V1 EN Figure 140: Function blocks 3.21.1.2 Functionality OR, OR6 and OR20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
Page 274 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 259: OR6 Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 1 BOOLEAN Input signal 2 BOOLEAN Input signal 3 BOOLEAN Input signal 4 BOOLEAN Input signal 5 BOOLEAN Input signal 6 Table 260: Input signals Name Type...
Page 275: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 263: OR20 Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal 3.21.1.4 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in the LHMI or in PCM600. 3.21.2 AND gate with two inputs AND, six inputs AND6 and twenty inputs AND20 3.21.2.1 Function block...
Page 276 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 265: AND6 Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 1 BOOLEAN Input signal 2 BOOLEAN Input signal 3 BOOLEAN Input signal 4 BOOLEAN Input signal 5 BOOLEAN Input signal 6 Table 266: AND20 Input signals Name Type...
Page 277: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 269: AND20 output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal 3.21.2.4 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in the LHMI or in PCM600. 3.21.3 XOR gate with two inputs XOR 3.21.3.1 Function block GUID-A0A888C9-CE89-4265-A503-ECBE0563C25E V1 EN...
Page 278: Not Gate Not
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.21.4 NOT gate NOT 3.21.4.1 Function block GUID-789510A4-0482-4788-90F5-CA5A21416F1D V1 EN Figure 143: Function block 3.21.4.2 Functionality NOT is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. NOT inverts the input signal. 3.21.4.3 Signals Table 272: NOT Input signals Name Type...
Page 279: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions R_TRIG detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input. When the rising edge is detected, the element assigns the output to TRUE. At the next execution round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input. 3.21.5.3 Signals Table 274:...
Page 280: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 277: F_TRIG Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal 3.21.6.4 Settings The function does not have any parameters available in the LHMI or in PCM600. 3.21.7 Switching device status decoder CLOSE position T_POS_CL, OPEN position T_POS_OP and OK status T_POS_OK 3.21.7.1...
Page 281: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 280: T_POS_OP Input signals Name Type Default Description Double binary Input signal Table 281: T_POS_OK Input signals Name Type Default Description Double binary Input signal Table 282: T_POS_CL Output signals Name Type Description CLOSE BOOLEAN Output signal...
Page 282: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile memory. Table 285: Truth table for SR flip-flop 1) Keep state/no change 3.21.8.3 Signals Table 286: SR Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN...
Page 283: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile memory. Table 288: Truth table for RS flip-flop 1) Keep state/no change 3.21.9.3 Signals Table 289: RS Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN...
Page 284: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.22.1.2 Functionality The real addition function ADDR adds the inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 together. ADDR executes the equation REAL_OUT = REAL_IN1 + REAL_IN2 If the value of the sum is outside the range, then the output quality is set as bad and VALID is set to FALSE.
Page 285: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions If the value of the quotient is outside the range, then the output quality is set as bad and VALID is set to FALSE. The minimum negative quotient value is restricted to -2097152.000 and the maximum positive quotient value is restricted to 2097152.000. 3.22.2.3 Signals Table 293:...
Page 286: Real Subtraction Subr
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 296: MULR Output signals Name Type Description REAL_OUT FLOAT32 Real output VALID BOOLEAN Output validity 3.22.4 Real subtraction SUBR 3.22.4.1 Function block GUID-E2D58040-A0A0-4791-960D-B21FAC223C99 V1 EN Figure 152: Function block 3.22.4.2 Functionality The real subtraction function SUBR subtracts input REAL_IN2 from REAL_IN1. SUBR executes the equation REAL_OUT = REAL_IN1 - REAL_IN2 If the value of the difference is outside the range, then the output quality is set as bad...
Page 287: Real Equal Comparator Eqr
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.22.5 Real equal comparator EQR 3.22.5.1 Function block GUID-D5810A82-DD6F-4679-9FBB-3A78724FB372 V1 EN Figure 153: Function block 3.22.5.2 Functionality The real equal comparator function EQR compares the real input REAL_IN1 with the real input REAL_IN2 and activates the binary output OUT if REAL_IN1 is within the region of REAL_IN2 + TOLR and REAL_IN2 - TOLR, that is, if REAL_IN1≥...
Page 288: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.22.5.3 Signals Table 299: EQR Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input 1 REAL_IN2 FLOAT32 Real input 2 Tolerance for TOLR FLOAT32 comparison Table 300: EQR Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output value 3.22.6...
Page 289: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Max 2097151.000 Not equal region REAL_IN2+TOLR REAL_IN2 REAL_IN2-TOLR Not equal region Min -2097152.000 GUID-3462F470-5FC7-445F-84EE-3F5B111411B8 V1 EN Figure 156: Region of NER comparison NER requires a positive value for TOLR, otherwise it may not function properly.
Page 290: Real Greater Than Or Equal Comparator Ger
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.22.7 Real greater than or equal comparator GER 3.22.7.1 Function block GUID-990E585B-093C-4811-B1AE-2492A6B3816E V1 EN Figure 157: Function block 3.22.7.2 Functionality The real greater than or equal comparator function GER compares the real input REAL_IN1 with the real input REAL_IN2 and activates the binary output OUT if REAL_IN1 is equal to or greater than REAL_IN2 - TOLR or greater than input REAL_IN2.
Page 291: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.22.7.3 Signals Table 303: GER Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input 1 REAL_IN2 FLOAT32 Real input 2 Tolerance for TOLR FLOAT32 comparison Table 304: GER Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output value 3.22.8...
Page 292: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions REAL_IN2+TOLR Equal region REAL_IN2 Lesser than region Min -2097152.000 GUID-41E4E6C0-821E-44FC-A2E7-67D7076B0591 V1 EN Figure 160: Region of LER comparison 3.22.8.3 Signals Table 305: LER Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input 1 REAL_IN2 FLOAT32 Real input 2...
Page 293: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.22.9.3 Signals Table 307: MAX3R Input signals Name Type Default Description REAL_IN1 FLOAT32 Real input value 1 REAL_IN2 FLOAT32 Real input value 2 REAL_IN3 FLOAT32 Real input value 3 Table 308: MAX3R Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 294: Real Switch Selector Switchr
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.22.11 Real switch selector SWITCHR 3.22.11.1 Function block GUID-7491F075-E970-4A2B-BED3-ABE2063EF67A V1 EN Figure 163: Function block 3.22.11.2 Functionality The real switch selector function SWITCHR is operated by the CTL_SW input and selects the output value REAL_OUT between the REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 inputs. Table 311: SWITCHR CTL_SW value...
Page 295: Integer 32-Bit Switch Selector Switchi32
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.22.12 Integer 32-bit switch selector SWITCHI32 3.22.12.1 Function block GUID-B52E02F4-08EA-4B45-84F1-92B8F47F6A68 V1 EN Figure 164: Function block 3.22.12.2 Functionality The integer 32-bit switch selector function SWITCHI32 is operated by the CTL_SW input, which selects the output value INT32_OUT between the INT32_IN1 and INT32_IN2 inputs.
Page 296: Load Profile Ldprlrc
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.24 Load profile LDPRLRC 3.24.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Load profile recorder LDPRLRC LOADPROF LOADPROF 3.24.2 Function block GUID-AB02574B-BFFB-42ED-B4E8-413F6FD0E648 V1 EN Figure 165: Function block 3.24.3 Functionality The protection relay is provided with a load profile recorder.
Page 297: Length Of Record
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.24.3.2 Length of record The recording capability is about 7.4 years when one quantity is recorded and the demand interval is set to 180 minutes. The recording time scales down proportionally when a shorter demand time is selected or more quantities are recorded. When the recording buffer is fully occupied, the oldest data are overwritten by the newest data.
Page 298: Clearing Of Record
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 192 . 168 . L D P 1 L D P 1 . C F G L D P 1 . D A T GUID-AE5B5039-1E75-4974-9153-6956F09B55B5 V1 EN Figure 166: Load profile record file naming 3.24.3.4 Clearing of record The load profile record can be cleared with Reset load profile rec via HMI,...
Page 299: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions GUID-5A377E16-D2BA-4BBC-BE4A-F2DAF4E19E45 V1 EN Figure 167: Example of a load profile record ACT configuration The memory consumption of load profile record is supervised, and indicated with two signals MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM, which could be used to notify the customer that recording should be backlogged by reading the recorded data from the protection relay.
Page 300: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Name Type Default Description IN_DMD9 Signal Measured demand quantity IN_DMD10 Signal Measured demand quantity IN_DMD11 Signal Measured demand quantity IN_DMD12 Signal Measured demand quantity Table 319: LDPRLRC Output signals Name Type Description MEM_WARN BOOLEAN Recording memory warning status MEM_ALARM BOOLEAN...
Page 301: Ethernet Channel Supervision Functions
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.25 Ethernet channel supervision functions 3.25.1 Redundant Ethernet channel supervison RCHLCCH 3.25.1.1 Function block GUID-A8230575-F7DE-40CE-8D93-53CE9CEBA87A V1 EN Figure 168: Function block 3.25.1.2 Functionality Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH represents LAN A and LAN B redundant Ethernet channels.
Page 302: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.25.1.4 Settings Table 323: RCHLCCH Settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Redundant mode Mode selection for Ethernet switch on redundant communication modules. The "None" mode is used with normal and Self-healing Ethernet topologies. Filter Mode A_B Filtering selection for message types...
Page 303: Ethernet Channel Supervision Schlcch
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Def. limit count 0...1000000 Default rate limit exceed count GOOSE limit alarm FALSE FALSE Goose rate limit TRUE exceed alarm SMV limit alarm FALSE FALSE Sampled measured TRUE values limit alarm Ucast limit alarm...
Page 304: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 326: SCHLCCH2 Output signals Name Type Description CH2LIV BOOLEAN Status of Ethernet channel X2/LAN Redundant mode is set to "None" or port is not When one of the redundant ports (LAN A or LAN B), value is TRUE if the port is receiving Ethernet frames.
Page 305: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.25.2.5 Monitored data Monitored data is available in six locations. • Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Activity/CH1LIV • Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Activity/CH2LIV • Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Activity/CH3LIV • Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Link statuses/LNK1LIV • Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Link statuses/LNK2LIV • Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Link statuses/LNK3LIV 3.25.2.6 Diagnostics Diagnostics data is available in Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/ Diagnostics/Xn (n = 1...3). Table 329: Diagnostic parameters for X1/LAN, X2/LAN and X3/LAN Parameter...
Page 306: External Hmi Wake-Up Eihmi
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.26 External HMI wake-up EIHMI 3.26.1 Function block GUID-178E3AE3-6330-4D3C-A16D-FAB3B36B9588 V1 EN Figure 170: Function block 3.26.2 Functionality The external HMI wake-up function EIHMI is a control block that is used to control certain parts of the HMI with Application Configuration in PCM600. Some data can be bound to control options to enable the required features: remote HMI wake-up, information when the device has been woken up and indication when the Home button on the HMI is activated.
Page 307: Application
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions PCM600 parameters EIHMI contains three paths to populate parameters visible in Parameter Setting in PCM600. • Configuration/HMI • Monitoring/Detached LHMI • Information/HW modules/EIHMI1 3.26.4 Application Substation HMI wake-up (door sensor) In this example, substation HMI devices need to be woken up when a person enters the substation to see that everything works as expected.
Page 308: Settings
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Table 331: EIHMI Output signals Name Type Description HOME BOOLEAN HMI home button indicator WOKEN BOOLEAN HMI woken indicator CONNECTION BOOLEAN HMI connection status indicator 3.26.6 Settings Table 332: HMI configuration parameters Parameter Description Backlight brightness Controls the HMI maximum backlight brightness.
Page 309: Signals
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.27.3 Signals Table 334: HMILCCH Output signals Name Type Description HMICHLIV BOOLEAN Status of the Ethernet channel X0/LAN Value is TRUE if the port is receiving Ethernet frames. Otherwise the value is FALSE. HMILNKLIV BOOLEAN Link status of Ethernet port X0/LAN...
Page 310: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions 3.28.2 Functionality Line differential channel supervision function SCHLCCH6 represents the X6/LD line differential channel. 3.28.3 Signals Table 336: SCHLCCH6 Output signals Name Type Description CH6LIV BOOLEAN Status of the line differential port X5/LD Value is TRUE if the port is receiving Ethernet frames.
Page 311 Section 3 1MRS759142 C Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Rx Power alarm FALSE FALSE SFP Receiver power TRUE alarm Tx Power alarm FALSE FALSE SFP Transmitter TRUE power alarm Voltage alarm FALSE FALSE SFP transceiver TRUE voltage alarm Temperature alarm FALSE...
Page 313: Section 4 Protection Functions
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Section 4 Protection functions Three-phase current protection 4.1.1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHxPTOC 4.1.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase non-directional PHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1 overcurrent protection, low stage Three-phase non-directional PHHPTOC 3I>>...
Page 314: Analog Input Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself. 4.1.1.4 Analog input configuration PHxPTOC has one analog group input which must be properly configured. Table 338: Analog inputs Input Description...
Page 315 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The protection relay does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range. The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function (INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.
Page 316 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings.
Page 317: Measurement Modes
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. One curve is for rectifier bridge protection. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 318: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Operating curve type PHLPTOC PHHPTOC (7) Long Time Very Inverse (8) Long Time Inverse (9) IEC Normal Inverse (10) IEC Very Inverse (11) IEC Inverse (12) IEC Extremely Inverse (13) IEC Short Time Inverse (14) IEC Long Time Inverse (15) IEC Definite Time (17) User programmable...
Page 319 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Selective overcurrent and short-circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems • Backup overcurrent and short-circuit protection of power transformers and generators • Overcurrent and short-circuit protection of various devices connected to the power system, for example shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and motors •...
Page 320 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions account the selectivity requirements, switching-in currents, and the thermal and mechanical withstand of the transformer and outgoing feeders. Traditionally, overcurrent protection of the transformer has been arranged as shown in Figure 177. The low-set stage PHLPTOC operates time-selectively both in transformer and LV-side busbar faults.
Page 321 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The differential protection is available only if the communication between the units is working properly and no CT failure situation is detected. If a communication failure exists, the protect area or unit is left out from the primary protection scheme. Therefore it is practical to use overcurrent protection as a local backup functionality.
Page 322 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Transformer and busbar overcurrent protection with reverse blocking principle By implementing a full set of overcurrent protection stages and blocking channels between the protection stages of the incoming feeders, bus-tie and outgoing feeders, it is possible to speed up the operation of overcurrent protection in the busbar and transformer LV-side faults without impairing the selectivity.
Page 323 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-579E8B4E-C08D-4BE0-8CDF-65DFB58DF13C V1 EN Figure 179: Numerical overcurrent protection functionality for a typical sub- transmission/distribution substation (feeder protection not shown). Blocking output = digital output signal from the start of a protection stage, Blocking in = digital input signal to block the operation of a protection stage The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading margins between successive protection stages can be kept short.
Page 324 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Radial outgoing feeder overcurrent protection The basic requirements for feeder overcurrent protection are adequate sensitivity and operation speed taking into account the minimum and maximum fault current levels along the protected line, selectivity requirements, inrush currents and the thermal and mechanical withstand of the lines to be protected.
Page 325 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-ED5C191F-A371-4BEF-A5CA-ABD0F092D56B V1 EN Figure 180: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a coordination plan.
Page 326: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-CF380ABD-ED08-44F4-8706-14182F0BE01B V1 EN Figure 181: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection 4.1.1.9 Signals Table 343: PHLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 327: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 346: PHLPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 347: PHHPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 348: PHIPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE...
Page 328 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 350: PHLPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Table 351: PHLPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 329 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 354: PHHPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Table 355: PHHPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 330: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 359: PHIPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time 4.1.1.11 Monitored data Table 360: PHLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32...
Page 331: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.1.12 Technical data Table 363: PHxPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz PHLPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I PHHPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 332: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.2.2 Function block GUID-5F0AABE8-DBDD-4CA1-8E7C-CA3B995EBAC8 V1 EN Figure 182: Function block 4.1.2.3 Functionality The three-phase directional overcurrent protection function DPHxPDOC is used as one-phase, two-phase or three-phase directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection for feeders. DPHxPDOC starts up when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and directional criterion is fulfilled.
Page 333: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 334 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The user can select either "Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse" operation. By setting the value of Allow Non Dir to "True", the non-directional operation is allowed when the directional information is invalid.
Page 335 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions the fictive voltage is unusable, the fault direction cannot be determined. The fictive voltage can be unusable for two reasons: • The fictive voltage is discarded after Voltage Mem time • The phase angle cannot be reliably measured before the fault situation. DPHxPDOC can be forced to the non-directional operation with the NON_DIR input.
Page 336 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The protection relay does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range. The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function (INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.
Page 337 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated.
Page 338: Measurement Modes
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.1.2.6 Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: “RMS”, “DFT” and “Peak-to-Peak”...
Page 339 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-54795C25-DC3D-49DB-8CA3-D1C2426E209E V1 EN Figure 186: Configurable operating sectors Table 368: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors, 0 = unknown or the direction cannot be defined due too low amplitude...
Page 340 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations, that is, when the START output is active. Self-polarizing as polarizing method Table 370: Equations for calculating angle difference for self-polarizing method Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference...
Page 341 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-999F7D36-4C98-4A31-9062-1E364C8E8935 V1 EN Figure 187: Single-phase earth fault, phase A In an example case of a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I in the self-polarizing method.
Page 342 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity Table 371: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method Faulte Used Used Angle difference fault polarizing phase current voltage ANGLE A ( ) - ϕ ϕ ϕ (Equation 14) GUID-7DE1B989-9FC4-4B39-886E-49F238723C17 V1 EN ANGLE B ( ) -...
Page 343 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I marked as φ.
Page 344 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Negative sequence voltage as polarizing quantity When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity, the angle difference between the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula for all fault types: ANGLE X ϕ...
Page 345 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference phases current polarizing voltage A - B ANGLE A ϕ ϕ ϕ − − − (Equation 24) GUID-62AD692C-5FA8-4A0D-9C04-63CBA54687F0 V1 EN B - C ANGLE B ϕ ϕ ϕ −...
Page 346: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The network rotating direction is set in the protection relay using the parameter in the HMI menu Configuration/System/Phase rotation. The default parameter value is "ABC". NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB GUID-B568D9C7-20F5-4A82-9894-16F6D26C31B5 V1 EN Figure 193: Examples of network rotating direction 4.1.2.8...
Page 347 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parallel lines or transformers When the lines are connected in parallel and if a fault occurs in one of the lines, it is practical to have DPHxPDOC to detect the direction of the fault. Otherwise, there is a risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de-energize the whole system connected to the LV side.
Page 348: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions grading between the network level stages is challenging without unnecessary delays in the time settings. In this case, it is practical to use the directional overcurrent protection relays to achieve a selective protection scheme. Directional overcurrent functions can be used in closed ring applications.
Page 349: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 374: DPHHPDOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional...
Page 350 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type 2=ANSI Very inv. 3=ANSI Norm. inv. 4=ANSI Mod. inv. 5=ANSI Def. Time 6=L.T.E.
Page 351 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable curve Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable curve Curve parameter E...
Page 352 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 382: DPHHPDOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Voltage Mem time 0...3000 Voltage memory time Pol quantity 1=Self pol 5=Cross pol...
Page 353: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.2.11 Monitored data Table 385: DPHLPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A 1=forward 2=backward -1=both DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B...
Page 354: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference, Phase C VMEM_USED BOOLEAN 0=False Voltage memory in use 1=True status DPHHPDOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.1.2.12 Technical data Table 387: DPHxPDOC Technical data Characteristic...
Page 355: Three-Phase Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phpvoc
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.3 Three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection PHPVOC 4.1.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase voltage-dependent PHPVOC 3I(U)> overcurrent protection 4.1.3.2 Function block GUID-99276729-9AA6-4988-A7D8-D6EE31C65E97 V1 EN Figure 197: Function block 4.1.3.3 Functionality...
Page 356: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 389: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measurements The function can work with any two voltage channels connected but it is recommended to connect all three voltage channels.
Page 357 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The calculated effective start value per phase, EFF_ST_VAL_A, EFF_ST_VAL_B, EFF_ST_VAL_C, is available in the Monitored data view and is used by the Level detector module. All three phase-to-phase voltages should be available for the function to operate properly.
Page 358 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-9F99FB62-175A-4F95-BD24-3F1149ACC8AB V1 EN Figure 199: Effective start value for voltage step characteristic The voltage slope characteristic is achieved by assigning different values to Voltage high limit and Voltage low limit. The effective start value calculation is based on the equations.
Page 359 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-700B42B1-7C1B-4FED-9CF5-087904BEE1F1 V1 EN Figure 200: Effective start value or voltage slope characteristic To achieve the voltage slope characteristics, Voltage high limit must always be set to a value greater than Voltage low limit. If Voltage high limit is lower than Voltage low limit, the voltage step characteristic is active with Voltage low limit being the cutoff value.
Page 360 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Voltage and input control mode If Control mode is set to "Voltage and input Ctrl", both the "Voltage control" and "Input control" modes are used. However, the “Input control” functionality is dominant over the “Voltage control” mode when ENA_LOW_LIM is active. No voltage dependency mode When Control mode is set to "No Volt dependency", the effective start value has no voltage dependency and the function acts as a normal time overcurrent function with...
Page 361: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation.
Page 362: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions voltage regulator AVR can help to maintain high fault currents by controlling the generator excitation system. If the AVR is out of service or if there is an internal fault in the operation of AVR, the low fault currents can go unnoticed and therefore a voltage-depended overcurrent protection should be used for backup.
Page 363: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 391: PHPVOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.1.3.8 Settings Table 392: PHPVOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.05 Start value Start value low 0.05...1.00...
Page 364: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 394: PHPVOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate 2=2 out of 3 activation...
Page 365: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.3.10 Technical data Table 397: PHPVOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current and voltage: ±2 Hz Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ± 0.002 × I Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 366: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.4.3 Functionality The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has generated a need for a thermal overload function also for power lines. A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions, and the introduction of the three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and distribution transformers function T1PTTR allows the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.
Page 367 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The function uses ambient temperature which can be measured locally or remotely. Local measurement is done by the protection relay. Remote measurement uses analog GOOSE to connect AMB_TEMP input. If the quality of remotely measured temperature is invalid or communication channel fails the function uses ambient temperature set in Env temperature Set.
Page 368 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions emergency operation for a few hours per years. Current values with the corresponding conductor temperatures are given in cable manuals. These values are given for conditions such as ground temperatures, ambient air temperature, the way of cable laying and ground thermal resistivity.
Page 369: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level. Θ − Θ   final lockout release τ = − ⋅   lockout release Θ − Θ final ...
Page 370: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • The sag of overhead lines can reach an unacceptable value. • If the temperature of conductors, for example aluminium conductors, becomes too high, the material will be destroyed. • In cables the insulation can be damaged as a consequence of overtemperature, and therefore phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults can occur.
Page 371: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.4.8 Settings Table 401: T1PTTR Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Env temperature Set -50...100 °C Ambient temperature used when no external temperature measurement available Current reference 0.05...4.00 0.01 1.00 The load current leading to Temperature raise temperature Temperature rise...
Page 372: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description T_ENA_CLOSE INT32 0...60000 Estimated time to deactivate BLK_CLOSE TEMP_AMB FLOAT32 -99...999 °C The ambient temperature used in the calculation T1PTTR Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.1.4.10 Technical data Table 406: T1PTTR Technical data...
Page 373: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.5.3 Functionality The three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants, function T2PTTR protects the transformer mainly from short-time overloads. The transformer is protected from long-time overloads with the oil temperature detector included in its equipment.
Page 374 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If the quality of remotely measured temperature is invalid or communication channel fails the function uses ambient temperature set in Env temperature Set. START OPERATE Temperature Thermal Max current ALARM selector estimator counter BLK_CLOSE AMB_TEMP BLOCK GUID-7E17E25E-8791-4F1A-AC90-05059AB4FCED V1 EN...
Page 375 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Thermal counter T2PTTR applies the thermal model of two time constants for temperature measurement. The temperature rise in degrees Celsius (°C) is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents according to the expression: t ∆...
Page 376 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-B9BD459A-7DB3-44FA-8677-6B4DF399609C V1 EN Figure 205: Effect of the Weighting factor p factor and the difference between the two time constants and one time constant models The actual temperature of the transformer is calculated by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature.
Page 377: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions menu. The temperature is stored in a nonvolatile memory and restored if the protection relay is restarted. The Max temperature setting defines the maximum temperature of the transformer in degrees Celsius (°C). The value of the Max temperature setting is usually given by transformer manufacturers.
Page 378 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The protection has several parameter sets located in the setting groups, for example one for a non-forced cooling and one for a forced cooling situation. Both the permissive steady-state loading level as well as the thermal time constant are influenced by the transformer cooling system.
Page 379: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Single time constant Short time constant (min) Long time constant (min) Weighting factor p (min) The default Max temperature setting is 105°C. This value is chosen since even though the IEC 60076-7 standard recommends 98°C as the maximum allowable temperature in long-time loading, the standard also states that a transformer can withstand the emergency loading for weeks or even months, which may produce the winding temperature of 140°C.
Page 380: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate temperature 80.0...120.0 100.0 Operate temperature, percent value Alarm temperature 40.0...100.0 90.0 Alarm temperature, percent value Reclose temperature 40.0...100.0 60.0 Temperature for reset of block reclose after operate Short time constant 6...60000 Short time constant in seconds...
Page 381: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.5.10 Technical data Table 416: T2PTTR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x I (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 ±2.0% of the theoretical value or ±0.50 s Operate time accuracy...
Page 382: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 417: Analog signals Input Description Three-phase currents See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 383: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions time is still counting, the reset timer is activated. If the drop-off time exceeds the set Reset delay time, the operating timer is reset. The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time.
Page 384: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.6.7 Signals Table 418: JAMPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 419: JAMPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate 4.1.6.8 Settings...
Page 385: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.6.10 Technical data Table 423: JAMPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0.96...
Page 386: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 424: Analog signals Input Description Three-phase currents See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 387: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated.
Page 388: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.7.8 Settings Table 427: LOFLPTUC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value low 0.01...0.50 0.01 0.10 Current setting/Start value low Start value high 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.50 Current setting/Start value high Operate delay time 400...600000 2000...
Page 389: Loss Of Phase, Undercurrent Phptuc
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.8 Loss of phase, undercurrent PHPTUC 4.1.8.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Loss of phase, undercurrent PHPTUC1 3I< 4.1.8.2 Function block GUID-B7D2342D-867A-4DAE-BA02-26CFC638B4E4 V1 EN Figure 210: Function block 4.1.8.3 Functionality...
Page 390: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.1.8.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of PHPTUC can be described with a module diagram.
Page 391: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output and the phase-specific ST_X output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time, the OPERATE output and the phase- specific OPR_X output are activated.
Page 392: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 434: PHPTUC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C START BOOLEAN Start ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B...
Page 393: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.8.10 Technical data Table 439: PHPTUC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current measured: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Start time Typically <55 ms Reset time <40 ms...
Page 394: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.9.4 Analog channel configuration MPTTR has one analog group input which must be properly configured. Table 440: Analog signals Input Description Three-phase currents See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings.
Page 395 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Max current selector Max current selector selects the highest measured TRMS phase current and reports it to Thermal level calculator. Internal FLC calculator Full load current (FLC) of the motor is defined by the manufacturer at an ambient temperature of 40°C.
Page 396 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • If the ambient temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP input in ACT. • When the ambient temperature measurement connected to 49M is set to "Not in use" in the RTD function. •...
Page 397 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions − τ θ θ ⋅ (Equation 39) GUID-DB478ADF-BD47-4A6A-8E1B-3FE4E9DF8A10 V1 EN θ initial thermal level when cooling begins GUID-DB9F72C2-99D6-4BA7-BEBC-2D8AD0FF17AC V1 EN Figure 214: Thermal behavior The required overload factor and negative sequence current heating effect factor are set by the values of the Overload factor and Negative Seq factor settings.
Page 398 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The calculated temperature of the protected object relative to the operate level, the TEMP_RL output, is available through the monitored data view or through the output signal TEMP_RL. The activation of the BLOCK input does not affect the calculated temperature.
Page 399 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 3840 1920 GUID-1636AB94-4243-4786-A634-6CD7A98B8592 V1 EN Figure 215: Trip curves when no prior load and p=20...100 %. Overload factor = 1.05. REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 400 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 3840 1920 160 320 480 640 GUID-73984064-528C-4F0A-A33E-349FB3E15A22 V1 EN Figure 216: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=100 %, Overload factor = 1.05. REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 401 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 3840 1920 GUID-4D610449-120E-42A3-8ECA-FCF72B8AEF33 V1 EN Figure 217: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=50 %. Overload factor = 1.05. REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 402: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.9.6 Application MPTTR is intended to limit the motor thermal level to predetermined values during the abnormal motor operating conditions. This prevents a premature motor insulation failure. The abnormal conditions result in overheating and include overload, stalling, failure to start, high ambient temperature, restricted motor ventilation, reduced speed operation, frequent starting or jogging, high or low line voltage or frequency, mechanical failure of the driven load, improper installation and unbalanced line...
Page 403 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions When protecting the objects without hot spot tendencies, for example motors started with soft starters, and cables, the value of Weighting factor p is set to 100 percent. With the value of Weighting factor p set to 100 percent, the thermal level decreases slowly after a heavy load condition.
Page 404 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4000 3000 2000 1000 Cold curve 1.05 GUID-3ADD45E7-A5DA-4C68-BA13-5D24FA2A3843 V1 EN Figure 218: The influence of Weighting factor p at prior load 1xFLC, timeconstant = 640 s, and Overload factor = 1.05 REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 405 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Setting the overload factor The value of Overload factor defines the highest permissible continuous load. The recommended value is 1.05. Setting the negative sequence factor During the unbalance condition, the symmetry of the stator currents is disturbed and a counter-rotating negative sequence component current is set up.
Page 406: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Setting the thermal restart level The restart disable level can be calculated as follows:   startup time of the motor θ 0 0 % + margin   − ⋅   operate time when no prior load ...
Page 407: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.9.8 Settings Table 445: MPTTR Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Overload factor 1.00...1.20 0.01 1.05 Overload factor (k) Alarm thermal value 50.0...100.0 95.0 Thermal level above which function gives an alarm Restart thermal Val 20.0...80.0...
Page 408: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.1.9.9 Monitored data Table 448: MPTTR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description TEMP_AMB FLOAT32 -99...999 °C The ambient temperature used in the calculation THERMLEV_ST FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 Thermal level at beginning of motor startup THERMLEV_END FLOAT32...
Page 409: Earth-Fault Protection
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Earth-fault protection 4.2.1 Non-directional earth-fault protection EFxPTOC 4.2.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFLPTOC Io> 51G/51N-1 low stage Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFHPTOC Io>> 51G/51N-2 high stage Non-directional earth-fault protection,...
Page 410: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 450: Analog inputs Input Description IRES Residual current (measured or calculated) See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings.
Page 411 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 412: Measurement Modes
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 413 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 452: Timer characteristics supported by different stages Operating curve type EFLPTOC EFHPTOC (1) ANSI Extremely Inverse (2) ANSI Very Inverse (3) ANSI Normal Inverse (4) ANSI Moderately Inverse (5) ANSI Definite Time (6) Long Time Extremely Inverse (7) Long Time Very Inverse (8) Long Time Inverse (9) IEC Normal Inverse...
Page 414: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.1.8 Application EFxPTOC is designed for protection and clearance of earth faults in distribution and sub-transmission networks where the neutral point is isolated or earthed via a resonance coil or through low resistance. It also applies to solidly earthed networks and earth-fault protection of different equipment connected to the power systems, such as shunt capacitor bank or shunt reactors and for backup earth-fault protection of power transformers.
Page 415: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 458: EFHPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 459: EFIPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.2.1.10 Settings Table 460: EFLPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 416 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 462: EFLPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable...
Page 417 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 466: EFHPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable...
Page 418: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.1.11 Monitored data Table 471: EFLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time EFLPTOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 472: EFHPTOC Monitored data Name Type...
Page 419: Directional Earth-Fault Protection Defxpdef
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Characteristic Value Minimum Typical Maximum Start time EFIPTOC 8 ms 11 ms 14 ms = 2 × set Start Fault 8 ms 9 ms 11 ms value Start = 10 × set Fault value EFHPTOC and 23 ms 26 ms...
Page 420: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.2.3 Functionality The directional earth-fault protection function DEFxPDEF is used as directional earth-fault protection for feeders. The function starts and operates when the operating quantity (current) and polarizing quantity (voltage) exceed the set limits and the angle between them is inside the set operating sector.
Page 421: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 476: Special conditions Condition Description The function can work with any two phase voltage U3P connected real measurements channels connected but it is recommended to connect all three voltage channels. VT connection must be "Wye" in that Setting URES calculated particular UTVTR.
Page 422 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "True", the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is checked even if the Directional mode was set to "Non-directional" or Allow Non Dir to "True". The protection relay does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.
Page 423 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 477: Operation modes Operation mode Description Phase angle The operating sectors for forward and reverse are Min forward angle , Max defined with the settings forward angle , Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle .
Page 424 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions = 0°. In addition, the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal RCA_CTL. RCA_CTL affects the Characteristic angle setting. The Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity due the inaccuracies in the measurement transformers.
Page 425 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If a drop-off situation, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings.
Page 426: Directional Earth-Fault Principles
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.2.6 Directional earth-fault principles In many cases it is difficult to achieve selective earth-fault protection based on the magnitude of residual current only. To obtain a selective earth-fault protection scheme, it is necessary to take the phase angle of Io into account. This is done by comparing the phase angle of the operating and polarizing quantity.
Page 427 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-7D3D8F75-685A-467C-834F-E581873CEA42 V1 EN Figure 223: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=0 degrees in a compensated network Example 2 The "Phase angle" mode is selected, solidly earthed network (φRCA = +60 deg) => Characteristic angle = +60 deg REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 428 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-A56EF42C-BADA-4E3B-9E82-3ACB1F5514F3 V1 EN Figure 224: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a solidly earthed network Example 3 The "Phase angle" mode is selected, isolated network (φRCA = -90 deg) => Characteristic angle = -90 deg REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 429 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-3287CC33-2A56-4625-BE74-BD3F6893EDB6 V1 EN Figure 225: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in an isolated neutral network In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral point and earth.
Page 430 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-5977520F-7AD1-4EF0-B4FD-2C40D135DD6D V1 EN Figure 226: Earth-fault situation in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in a compensated network In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of the protection relays.
Page 431 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions compensated networks. As a result the characteristic angle is set automatically to suit the earthing method used. The RCA_CTL input can be used to change the operation criteria as described in Table 479 Table 480.
Page 432: Measurement Modes
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-C00F95F5-ED8F-4038-9969-2BEFEFB2A05C V1 EN Figure 228: Extended operation area in directional earth-fault protection 4.2.2.7 Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and "Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting.
Page 433: Timer Characteristics
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 434: Directional Earth-Fault Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 483: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF Note (1) Immediate Available for all operate time curves (2) Def time reset Available for all operate time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for ANSI and user programmable curves 4.2.2.9...
Page 435 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-7CA4C8EE-0CA2-4290-9DF2-1FA5306E0774 V1 EN Figure 229: Configurable operating sectors in phase angle characteristic Table 484: Momentary operating direction Fault direction The value for DIRECTION Angle between the polarizing and operating 0 = unknown quantity is not in any of the defined sectors. Angle between the polarizing and operating 1= forward quantity is in the forward sector.
Page 436 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions to operate in the directional mode as non-directional, since the directional information is invalid. Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) criteria A more modern approach to directional protection is the active or reactive current measurement. The operating characteristic of the directional operation depends on the earthing principle of the network.
Page 437 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Iosin(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 1 GUID-1EDCE64D-4CE3-455B-A274-C6AF085425FC V1 EN Figure 230: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in forward fault The operating sector is limited by angle correction, that is, the operating sector is 180 degrees - 2*(angle correction).
Page 438 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-2C299B91-22E4-4420-97DE-304B2EADBBED V1 EN Figure 231: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in reverse fault Example 3. Iocos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 1 GUID-12BABEB2-C100-40C3-9283-0F5A7B998A08 V1 EN Figure 232: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in forward fault Example 4. REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 439 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Iocos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 2 GUID-89556830-D43E-4629-AB42-5492912B8FC9 V1 EN Figure 233: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in reverse fault Phase angle 80 The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the Operation mode setting by using the value "Phase angle 80".
Page 440 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-83DB90DD-474D-4D97-B2B6-C170AEE253AC V1 EN Figure 234: Operating characteristic for phase angle 80 Io / % of I Min forward angle 80 deg Operating zone 3% of In 70 deg Non- 1% of In operating zone GUID-3DE57C08-50B8-437F-89F8-CAB6AC1C0AA1 V1 EN Figure 235: Phase angle 80 amplitude (Directional mode = Forward)
Page 441 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Phase angle 88 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the following differences: • The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they have a fixed value of 88 degrees •...
Page 442: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Io / % of I 88 deg 100% of In Min forward angle 85 deg 20% of In 73 deg 1% of In GUID-95353022-78F0-47E8-A179-A79CC3F5DBA4 V1 EN Figure 237: Phase angle 88 amplitude (Directional mode = Forward) 4.2.2.10 Application The directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF is designed for protection and...
Page 443 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions same when the resonance coil is disconnected from between the neutral point and earth. System neutral earthing is meant to protect personnel and equipment and to reduce interference for example in telecommunication systems. The neutral earthing sets challenges for protection systems, especially for earth-fault protection.
Page 444: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions core balance current transformers. The following figure describes how measuring transformers can be connected to the protection relay. GUID-2A687FC8-917A-48A0-9DF2-6167F71BAD26 V1 EN Figure 238: Connection of measuring transformers 4.2.2.11 Signals Table 486: DEFLPDEF Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 445: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 487: DEFHPDEF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents IRES SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Three-phase voltages URES SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier...
Page 446 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type 2=ANSI Very inv. 3=ANSI Norm. inv. 4=ANSI Mod. inv. 5=ANSI Def. Time 6=L.T.E.
Page 447 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable curve Table 493: DEFLPDEF Non group settings (Advanced)
Page 448 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min forward angle 0...180 Minimum phase angle in forward direction Min reverse angle 0...180 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction Voltage start value 0.010...1.000 0.001 0.010 Voltage start value Table 495: DEFHPDEF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter...
Page 449: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Correction angle 0.0...10.0 Characteristic correction angle in IoCos and IoSin mode Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Rotate polarizing quantity 1=True Pol quantity 3=Zero seq. volt. 3=Zero seq. volt. Reference quantity used to determine 4=Neg.
Page 450: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.2.14 Technical data Table 500: DEFxPDEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz DEFLPDEF Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 451: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.3.2 Function block GUID-1DDDFEDE-159B-4EC6-9CF0-66653EAE3C79 V1 EN Figure 239: Function block 4.2.3.3 Functionality The transient/intermittent earth-fault protection function INTRPTEF is a function designed for the protection and clearance of permanent and intermittent earth faults in distribution and sub-transmission networks.
Page 452: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.2.3.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of INTRPTEF can be described with a module diagram.
Page 453 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions To satisfy the sensitivity requirements, basic earth fault protection (based on fundamental frequency phasors) should always be used in parallel with the INTRPTEF function. The Fault indication logic module determines the direction of the fault. The fault direction determination is secured by multi-frequency neutral admittance measurement and special filtering techniques.
Page 454 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-A81838E7-95A2-49CA-BC6B-786025D1D12E V1 EN Figure 241: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Transient EF” mode in the faulty feeder In the "Intermittent EF" mode the OPERATE output is activated when the following conditions are fulfilled: • the number of transients that have been detected exceeds the Peak counter limit setting •...
Page 455 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-DBF90CBB-B904-4C00-9B82-CD9950D34550 V1 EN Figure 242: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Intermittent EF” mode in the faulty feeder, Peak counter limit=3 The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the monitored data view.
Page 456: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the “Block OPERATE output” mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.2.3.6 Application INTRPTEF is an earth-fault function dedicated to operate in intermittent and permanent earth faults occurring in distribution and sub-transmission networks.
Page 457: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Earth-fault transients In general, earth faults generate transients in currents and voltages. There are several factors that affect the magnitude and frequency of these transients, such as the fault moment on the voltage wave, fault location, fault resistance and the parameters of the feeders and the supplying transformers.
Page 458: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.3.8 Settings Table 505: INTRPTEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode 2=Forward 3=Reverse Operate delay time 40...1200000 Operate delay time Voltage start value 0.05...0.50 0.01 0.20 Voltage start value...
Page 459: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.3.10 Technical data Table 509: INTRPTEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy (Uo criteria with transient Depending on the frequency of the measured protection) current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Uo Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics...
Page 460: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The measured admittance is compared to the admittance characteristic boundaries in the admittance plane. The supported characteristics include overadmittance, oversusceptance, overconductance or any combination of the three. The directionality of the oversusceptance and overconductance criteria can be defined as forward, reverse or non-directional, and the boundary lines can be tilted if required by the application.
Page 461: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.4.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on" and "off". The operation of EFPADM can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 462 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions fault − fault (Equation 45) GUID-7259BC11-9B96-4F22-952D-5B6FEAE7D23B V1 EN Admittance Clc mode = "Delta" − ∆ fault prefault − − − ∆ fault prefault (Equation 46) GUID-9DEA8B5B-8A24-4622-A5F6-D9711912BC2C V1 EN Calculated neutral admittance [Siemens] Residual current during the fault [Amperes] fault Residual voltage during the fault [Volts] fault...
Page 463 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions ≈ − ⋅ j (Equation 48) GUID-82C36150-43AA-42FC-863B-80C48C964CED V1 EN Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances (Y ) of the protected feeder Fdtot Magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is zero ohm Magnitude of the nominal phase-to-earth voltage of the system Equation 47...
Page 464 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions A B C Protected feeder Background network Reverse Fault eTot Im(Yo) Re(Yo) Reverse fault: Yo ≈ -j*I GUID-E45A96D0-0B28-45A7-A497-EAA52D24F82E V1 EN Figure 247: Admittance calculation during a reverse fault Resistance of the parallel resistor Inductance of the compensation coil Resistance of the neutral earthing resistor Phase-to-earth admittance of the protected feeder Phase-to-earth admittance of the background network...
Page 465 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The result is valid regardless of the neutral earthing method. In this case, the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to leakage losses of the protected feeder. As they are typically very small, the resistive part is close to zero. Due to inaccuracies in the voltage and current measurement, the small real part of the apparent neutral admittance may appear positive.
Page 466 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the first quadrant in the admittance plane, close to the im(Yo) axis, see Figure 248. Equation 52 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in compensated networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background network and the coil including the parallel resistor.
Page 467 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions A B C Protected feeder Forward Fault eTot Background network eTot Forward fault, high resistance earthed network: Yo ≈ (I +j*(I ))/U eTot Im(Yo) Forward fault, unearthed network: Yo ≈ j*(I eTot Under-comp. (K<1) Re(Yo) Resonance (K=1) Reverse fault:...
Page 468 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions when the compensated network is operated either in the undercompensated or overcompensated mode. For example, in a 15 kV compensated network, the magnitude of the earth fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω) and the magnitude of the network is 100 A (Rf = 0 Ω).
Page 469 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions EFPADM supports a wide range of different characteristics to achieve the maximum flexibility and sensitivity in different applications. The basic characteristic shape is selected with the Operation mode and Directional mode settings. Operation mode defines which operation criterion or criteria are enabled and Directional mode defines if the forward, reverse or non-directional boundary lines for that particular operation mode are activated.
Page 470 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 5 00 4 33 ⋅ 11547 (Equation 58) GUID-EBA81E4F-4DED-4920-A31C-4CE757ACEE27 V1 EN GUID-82AE4AD6-42E8-46AB-BC1F-9C2B65D01B6E V1 EN Figure 249: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Non-directional" REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 471 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-DF3E1525-352F-48A9-9AB1-3EDA926534FC V1 EN Figure 250: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Forward" REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 472 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-698C3C81-51CE-44D8-A481-8D560C625494 V1 EN Figure 251: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Reverse" Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the Operate delay time setting, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 473: Neutral Admittance Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions deactivated. The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function.
Page 474 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-5F36C6E5-9310-4E33-8CD9-16DB4ABDAEDB V1 EN Figure 252: Overadmittance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the origin. Non-directional overconductance characteristic The non-directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Go"...
Page 475 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-903614B9-E5DF-43E9-987D-028ADAD6E9CA V1 EN Figure 253: Non-directional overconductance characteristic. Left figure: classical non-directional overconductance criterion. Middle figure: characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure: characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle. Forward directional overconductance characteristic The forward directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Go"...
Page 476 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Bo" and Directional mode to "Forward". The characteristic is defined by one oversusceptance boundary line with the Susceptance forward setting. For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary line can be tilted by the angle defined with the Susceptance tilt Ang setting.
Page 477 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the characteristic. The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is applicable in unearthed, high-resistance earthed and compensated networks or in systems where the system earthing may temporarily change during normal operation from compensated network to unearthed system.
Page 478 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis. A positive Susceptance tilt Ang value rotates the oversusceptance boundary line counterclockwise from the horizontal axis. In case of the non-directional conductance and susceptance criteria, the Conductance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward and the Susceptance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Susceptance forward.
Page 479: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-40A550B7-1DFE-4009-9272-E9187FAB5E74 V1 EN Figure 258: Combined non-directional overconductance and non-directional oversusceptance characteristic The non-directional overconductance and non-directional oversusceptance characteristic provides a good sensitivity and selectivity when the characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a proper margin.
Page 480 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Residual overvoltage condition is used as a start condition for the admittance-based earth-fault protection. When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage start value, an earth fault is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released. In order to guarantee a high security of protection, that is, avoid false starts, the Voltage start value setting must be set above the highest possible value of Uo during normal operation with a proper margin.
Page 481 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8 Rf = 500 ohm Rf = 2500 ohm Rf = 5000 ohm Rf = 10000 ohm 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm...
Page 482 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Example In a 15 kV, 50 Hz compensated network, the maximum value for Uo during the healthy state is 10%×Uph. Maximum earth-fault current of the system is 100 A. The maximum earth fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω). The applied active current forcing scheme uses a 15 A resistor (at 15 kV), which is connected in parallel to the coil during the fault after a 1.0 second delay.
Page 483 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Directional mode = "Non-directional" The admittance characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a proper margin, see Figure 262. Different setting groups can be used to allow adaptation of protection settings to different feeder and network configurations. Conductance forward This setting should be set based on the parallel resistor value of the coil.
Page 484: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-FC4AFF31-CD9C-4FEE-97BA-03FB63114DC8 V1 EN Figure 262: Admittances of the example 4.2.4.8 Signals Table 513: EFPADM Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current URES SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 485: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.4.9 Settings Table 515: EFPADM Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage start value 0.01...2.00 0.01 0.15 Voltage start value Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode 2=Forward 3=Reverse Operation mode 1=Yo 1=Yo Operation criteria...
Page 486: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 518: EFPADM Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Admittance Clc mode 1=Normal 1=Normal Admittance calculation mode 2=Delta Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Rotate polarizing quantity 1=True Min operate current...
Page 487: Rotor Earth-Fault Protection, Injection Method Mrefptoc
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.5 Rotor earth-fault protection, injection method MREFPTOC 4.2.5.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Rotor earth-fault protection, injection MREFPTOC Io>R method 4.2.5.2 Function block GUID-DE49B8E2-B844-40FA-A86C-D777CA1AEE3E V1 EN Figure 263: Function block 4.2.5.3...
Page 488: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.2.5.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on"...
Page 489: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer 1 Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The timer characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode, the OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operating delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated.
Page 490 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-392EB0A0-2BB1-4FD4-913A-7D2686BEEC6B V1 EN Figure 265: Principle of the rotor earth-fault protection with the current injection device The auxiliary AC voltage forms a small charging current I to flow via the coupling capacitors, resistances of the brushes and the leakage capacitance between the field circuit and earth.
Page 491 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-7E96C44F-425D-4057-9046-F34EC9A6DC97 V1 EN Figure 266: Measured current as a function of the rotor earth-fault resistance with various field-to-earth capacitance values with the measuring circuit resistance R = 3.0 Ω, f = 50 Hz. Only one coupling capacitor is used.
Page 492: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.5.7 Signals Table 522: MREFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 523: MREFPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START...
Page 493: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.5.9 Monitored data Table 527: MREFPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time MREFPTOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.2.5.10 Technical data Table 528: MREFPTOC Technical data Characteristic...
Page 494: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.6.2 Function block GUID-6A982B06-C7DE-4123-AF18-1A6F6927ED4C V1 EN Figure 267: Function block 4.2.6.3 Functionality The harmonics-based earth-fault protection function HAEFPTOC is used instead of a traditional earth-fault protection in networks where a fundamental frequency component of the earth-fault current is low due to compensation. By default, HAEFPTOC is used as a standalone mode.
Page 495: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.6.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of HAEFPTOC can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 496 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Frequency GUID-784C2760-D2F1-4790-BC1C-558DBD0D6014 V1 EN Figure 269: High-pass filter Level detector The harmonics current is compared to the Start value setting. If the value exceeds the value of the Start value setting, Level detector sends an enabling signal to the Timer module.
Page 497 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 530: Values of the Enable reference use setting Enable reference use Functionality Standalone In the standalone mode, depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of the Operate delay time setting in the DT mode or the value defined by the inverse time curve,...
Page 498: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operation and reset times. The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operation time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting.
Page 499: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-3E130C58-961B-47CD-8F4C-0221E64CCB33 V1 EN Figure 270: Protection scheme based on the analog GOOSE communication with three analog GOOSE receivers 4.2.6.7 Signals Table 531: HAEFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description IRES SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode...
Page 500: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.6.8 Settings Table 533: HAEFPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.10 Start value Time multiplier 0.025...15.000 0.005 1.000 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 100...300000 Operate delay time Operating curve type...
Page 501: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 536: HAEFPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time 4.2.6.9 Monitored data Table 537: HAEFPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32...
Page 502: Wattmetric-Based Earth-Fault Protection Wpwde
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.7 Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE 4.2.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE Po> -> 4.2.7.2 Function block GUID-9CB65CEF-77E3-4E86-B480-47C373CB6CF9 V1 EN Figure 271: Function block 4.2.7.3 Functionality The wattmetric-based earth-fault protection function WPWDE can be used to detect...
Page 503: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 539: Analog inputs Input Description IRES Residual current (measured or calculated) URES Residual voltage (measured or calculated) See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 540: Special conditions Condition...
Page 504 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer IRES Directional Level OPERATE calculation detector URES RCA_CTL Residual START power calculation Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-1FBCBB74-8683-4E03-BE20-F61A65A590E7 V2 EN Figure 272: Function module diagram Directional calculation The Directional calculation module monitors the angle between the operating quantity (residual current Io) and polarizing quantity (residual voltage Uo).
Page 505 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-BB1DF1F6-46B1-4275-A411-40828C893235 V1 EN Figure 273: Definition of the relay characteristic angle The phase angle difference is calculated based on the Characteristic angle setting (also known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) or Relay Base Angle or Maximum Torque Angle (MTA)).
Page 506 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions -Uo (Polarizing quantity) Forward area Backward area RCA = -90˚ Maximum torque line Io (Operating quantity) Minimum operate current Forward area Backward area GUID-519B6485-D523-4A25-A4EE-8BAAEB3D1F5D V1 EN Figure 274: Definition of relay characteristic angle, RCA = -90° in an isolated network Characteristic angle should be set to a positive value if the operating signal lags the polarizing signal and to a negative value if the...
Page 507 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions sector. The Correction angle setting should be done carefully as the phase angle error of the measurement transformer varies with the connected burden as well as with the magnitude of the actual primary current that is being measured. An example of how Correction angle alters the operating region is as shown: Maximum torque line forward direction (RCA = 0˚)
Page 508: Timer Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions the set Current start value (×In), Voltage start value (×Un) and Power start value (×Pn) respectively. When all three quantities exceed the limits, Level detector enables the Timer module. As nominal power is the result of the multiplication of the nominal current and the nominal voltage Pn = Un ×...
Page 509 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions ⋅ [ ] = (Equation 64) GUID-265A0A26-D3C8-41C0-B921-AF61CBA50458 V1 EN t[s] operation time in seconds Time multiplier set value of Reference power set value of calculated residual power REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 510 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-2431C47B-D68C-47FB-90CB-12B3977C1459 V1 EN REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 511: Measurement Modes
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Figure 276: Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for S set at 0.15 xPn 4.2.7.7 Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and "Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting.
Page 512 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions through its earth capacitances. The capacitive current of the complete network (sum of all feeders) is compensated with the coil. A typical network with the wattmetric protection is an undercompensated network where the coil current I is the total earth-fault current of the network Ctot Ctot...
Page 513: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and inductive resonance coil current compensate each other, meaning that the fault current is mainly resistive and has zero phase shift compared to the residual voltage. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen as 0º.
Page 514: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Power start value 0.003...1.000 0.001 0.003 Start value for residual active power Reference power 0.050...1.000 0.001 0.150 Reference value of residual power for Wattmetric IDMT curves Characteristic angle -179...180 Characteristic angle Time multiplier...
Page 515: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between operating angle and characteristic angle RES_POWER FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 Calculated residual active power WPWDE Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.2.7.12 Technical data Table 547: WPWDE Technical data Characteristic...
Page 516: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.8.2 Function block GUID-8AAC9755-B961-47F2-8EEA-D4915B3336FF V2 EN Figure 279: Function block 4.2.8.3 Functionality The third harmonic-based stator earth-fault protection H3EFPSEF is used to detect stator earth fault at the neutral point and at least up to 15...20% from the neutral point along the stator winding.
Page 517: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. The GRPOFF signal is available in the function block called Protection. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 549: Special conditions Condition...
Page 518 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 3rd harmonic calculation (terminal side) 3rd harmonic calculation calculates the magnitude and phase angle of the third harmonic voltage at the generator terminal Ū . Calculation of the third harmonic 3H_T voltage depends on the availability of terminal side voltage and is specified by the Voltage selection setting.
Page 519 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Magnitude of the third harmonic differential voltage Ū Terminal side third harmonic voltage phasor 3H_T Ū Neutral side third harmonic voltage phasor 3H_N The magnitude of the third harmonic differential voltage UD_3H and the phase angle difference between the terminal side and neutral side third harmonic voltage U_3HANGL_T_N are available in the Monitored data view.
Page 520: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Once activated, Timer activates the START output. The Timer characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated.
Page 521 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Fundamental frequency-based residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV • Third harmonic-based stator earth-fault protection H3EFPSEF GUID-20EF93CC-3D90-4A44-9510-3D408B5EE534 V1 EN Figure 281: Complete stator earth-fault protection Third harmonic voltage-based differential protection The voltage generated by a generator is not a perfect sinusoidal wave but contains triplen harmonics voltages.
Page 522 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-69094BC0-5DBF-4B2F-ACB2-B8681A1F8FEB V1 EN Figure 282: Typical example of the third-harmonic voltage measured at the generator neutral and terminals under different conditions The operating equation of the protection is described in the following equation. Beta U −...
Page 523 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The equation defines the "operate" and "restrain" regions of the protection. The third harmonic differential protection operates according to the following equation. Beta U ≥ ⋅ (Equation 72) GUID-A98DED72-BA44-41BE-861C-07B4531038A6 V1 EN Ū Neutral side third harmonic voltage phasor 3H_N Ū...
Page 524 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions point of the stator winding. However, to assure the best performance, measurements during the normal operation of the generator are to be made during commissioning. The value of the Beta setting must be set to “1.00”. Loading of the generator is done at 5 to 10 different load points and the third harmonic differential and bias voltage are measured.
Page 525 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions However, the generator breaker normally exists between the protected generator and its power transformer. Stator winding (1-x) E Generator CB Step-up unit Circuit breaker Neutral Terminal side side (1-x) Fault at distance ‘x’ from generator neutral = 3*C = 3*C /2 + 3*C...
Page 526: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions For a particular value of Beta the third harmonic neutral voltage is measured with the generator in the no-load condition and the circuit breaker in the closed position. With the same condition, the third harmonic neutral voltage with the circuit breaker in the open position is measured.
Page 527: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 554: H3EFPSEF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Table 555: H3EFPSEF Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage block value...
Page 528: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.8.10 Technical data Table 557: H3EFPSEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: ±2 Hz ±5% of the set value or ±0.004 × U Typically 35 ms 1)2) Start time Reset time...
Page 529 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions directional earth-fault protection (such as Iocos) and transient earth-fault protection (such as Wischer principle) combining the same functionality into a single function block (see Table 558). Table 558: Comparison of the MFADPSDE functionality with traditional methods in resonant earthed networks Earth-fault type Transient...
Page 530: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions MFADPSDE supports fault direction indication both in operate and in non-operate direction, which can be used during fault location process. The in-built transient detector can be used to identify restriking or intermittent earth faults, and discriminate them from permanent or continuous earth faults.
Page 531 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The operation of MFADPSDE can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the following sections. PEAK_IND Transient INTR_EF detector DIRECTION FAULT_DIR IRES Multi- Fault START frequency Operation direction OPERATE...
Page 532 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Resonance Curve Uo [%] Voltage start value Margin few % Maximum healthy-state lcoil: A 68 A GUID-08EC8DF9-03C9-4AFB-BF61-9EDA74BC6B49 V1 EN Figure 287: Example of selection of setting Voltage start value to maximize the earth-fault detection sensitivity based on the resonance curve calculated by the coil controller There are three MFADPSDE instances (stages) available.
Page 533 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions times of stages 1 and 2 avoid unnecessary breaker operations during self- extinguishing earth faults. • Fast tripping of low-ohmic permanent earth faults regardless of their type (continuous or intermittent), stage 1 • Delayed tripping of higher-ohmic permanent earth faults regardless of their type (continuous or intermittent), stage 2 •...
Page 534 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions   ⋅   = ⋅     −     (Equation 77) GUID-6DC260CF-024F-4043-A594-9218A3BCB221 V1 EN 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 nth harmonic frequency neutral admittance phasor nth harmonic frequency zero-sequence current phasor nth harmonic frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor nth harmonic frequency susceptance, Im Y...
Page 535 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions is calculated. This phasor is used as directional phasor in determining the osum CPS direction of the fault. osum CPS osum (Equation 79) GUID-EF3163AC-C589-46BD-A45C-79D17FD3B8C4 V1 EN osum CPS osum osum (Equation 80) GUID-8E66FD4E-0FAB-4F0C-A38B-0E6FF1070648 V1 EN osum CPS osum osum...
Page 536 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The direction of MFADPSDE is defined with setting Directional mode as "Forward" or "Reverse". The operation characteristic is defined by a tilted operation sector as illustrated in Figure 289. The characteristic provides universal applicability, that is, it is valid in both compensated and unearthed networks even if the compensation coil is temporarily switched off.
Page 537 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions +90 deg. +45 deg.  0 deg.    Tilt angle -90 deg. GUID-A7DE7E6B-6170-4805-A126-F9F94196ECAE V1 EN Figure 289: Directional characteristic of MFADPSDE The residual current should be measured with accurate Core Balance Current Transformer (CBCT) to minimize the measurement errors, especially phase displacement.
Page 538 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions EFFd detuning   atan ϕ =   damping   (Equation 84) GUID-16405161-8FB6-4E30-86F7-9CC0C424C2F0 V1 EN Earth-fault current produced by the protected feeder [A] EFFd Detuning of the arc suppression coil [A] detuning System damping [A] damping Example 1:...
Page 539 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions fault. MFADPSDE can then adapt to a fault direction change more rapidly if a single- phase earth fault persists in the system after the other faulty feeder has been tripped (the cross-country fault has been transformed into a single-phase earth fault). The direction of MFADPSDE is supervised by a settable current magnitude threshold, setting Min operate current.
Page 540 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions fault (Rf = 0 Ω). Another advantage of the method is that it can estimate correct current magnitude also during intermittent or restriking faults. The setting Min operate current defines the minimum operate current which must be exceeded for the function to start or operate.
Page 541 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If the phase angle of accumulated sum admittance phasor is greater than 45 degrees, current magnitude supervision is based on the amplitude of , which must exceed o stab the set minimum operate current threshold. If the phase angle of accumulated sum admittance phasor is below 45 degrees, current magnitude supervision is based on the resistive part of , which must exceed the set minimum operate current threshold.
Page 542 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions +90 deg. +45 deg.  0 deg.    Tilt angle -90 deg. GUID-D8B2E0B2-07FB-467F-A49C-98189BAF3456 V1 EN Figure 291: Operating quantity = "Resistive" and Directional mode = "Forward" The resistive mode is valid for resonant earthed networks and high-resistance earthed systems, but not in case of unearthed networks.
Page 543 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions +90 deg. +45 deg.  0 deg.    Tilt angle -90 deg. GUID-68F17A2E-924C-4260-910A-AF9EED1AD3FB V1 EN Figure 292: Operating quantity = "Amplitude" and Directional mode = "Forward" If the “Adaptive” or “Resistive” operating quantity is selected, the setting Min operate current should be set to value: p IRtot ...
Page 544 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-5A4C3E3A-A8FD-4C4E-9C3C-3EB3AF2AC35C V1 EN Figure 293: Example of interpretation of network damping value, I_DAMPING, calculated by the coil controller For example, if the resistive current of the parallel resistor is 10 A (at primary voltage level), then a value of 0.5 ·...
Page 545 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions and should not be set too high as this can inhibit the disconnection of the faulty feeder. The residual current should be measured with an accurate CBCT to minimize the measurement errors, especially phase displacement. The parallel resistor should be kept connected during the healthy state so that in case of a fault, earth-fault protection can immediately see sufficient value of resistive component for operation.
Page 546 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions PEAK_IND release Reset timer INTR_EF Reset delay time Reset delay time GUID-58BCE12B-E8B6-469C-B39A-251AA6031EBF V1 EN Figure 294: Example of operation of Transient detector: indication of detected transient by PEAK_IND output and detection of restriking or intermittent earth fault by INTR_EF output (setting Peak counter limit = 3) Operation logic...
Page 547 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions supervision, and which is further defined with setting Operating quantity (available options are "Adaptive", "Amplitude" and "Resistive"). The START output is activated once Start delay time has elapsed. OPERATE output is activated once Operate delay time has elapsed and the above three conditions are valid.
Page 548 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-8EFFEC9E-77CD-4534-8C3E-E10BB61575DA V1 EN Figure 295: Operation in “General EF” mode Alarming EF Operation mode “Alarming EF” is applicable in all kinds of earth faults in high- impedance earthed networks, that is, in compensated, unearthed and high resistance earthed networks, where fault detection is only alarming.
Page 549 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions supervision, and which is further defined with setting Operating quantity (available options are "Adaptive", "Amplitude" and "Resistive"). The START output is activated once Start delay time has elapsed. OPERATE output is not valid in the “Alarming EF” mode. Reset timer is started if any of the above three conditions are not valid.
Page 550 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-9D194E0D-930A-47ED-8BF8-2FFEADCDC4AD V1 EN Figure 296: Operation in “Alarming EF” mode Intermittent EF Operation mode “Intermittent EF” is used to detect restriking or intermittent earth faults. A required number of intermittent earth fault transients set with the Peak counter limit setting must be detected for operation.
Page 551 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Transient is detected by Transient detector (indicated with PEAK_IND output) • Earth fault is detected by the GFC at the time of transient • Fault direction equals Directional mode setting • Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds the o stab set Min operate current level, which is applied in current magnitude threshold...
Page 552 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-C3B6910E-1114-4396-A891-5DDB9490333A V1 EN Figure 297: Operation in “Intermittent EF” mode, Peak counter limit = 3 Transient EF Operation mode “Transient EF” is dedicated for detecting fast transient faults where the fault current stays on only for a very short time. It is recommended method in networks, where network damping has very small value or when parallel resistor of the coil is not used, for example in sub-transmission networks.
Page 553 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Earth fault is detected by the GFC • Fault direction equals Directional mode setting and fault direction detection is done only at the beginning of the fault • Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds the o stab set Min operate current level, which is applied in current magnitude threshold...
Page 554 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions value. Tilt angle should be 10 degrees especially if the residual current is measured with Holmgreen (sum) connection of phase current CTs. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 555 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Detection of earth fault from residual overvoltage, ROVPTOV • Delay of release MFADPSDE using TONGAPC connected to the BLOCK input of MFA (inversed) • Delay of release (TONGAPC: On delay time (ms)) based on known time delays in resistor connection •...
Page 556 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions sequence voltage falls below Voltage start value. BLK_EF is reset once the reset delay time elapses. Activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the BLK_EF output and resets Timer. BLK_EF output is activated when the following conditions are met: •...
Page 557: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.9.6 Application MFADPSDE provides selective directional earth-fault protection for high-impedance earthed networks, that is, for compensated, unearthed and high-resistance earthed systems. It can be applied for the earth-fault protection of overhead lines and underground cables, regardless of the earth-fault type (continuous, transient or intermittent) or the fault resistance value (low or high ohmic).
Page 558: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions MFADPSDE supports fault direction indication in operate and non-operate directions which can be used during fault location process. The in-built transient detector can be used to identify restriking or intermittent earth faults, and discriminate them from permanent or continuous earth faults.
Page 559: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.9.8 Settings Table 565: MFADPSDE Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 2=Forward 2=Forward Directional mode 3=Reverse Voltage start value 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.10 Voltage start value Operate delay time 60...1200000 Operate delay time Table 566:...
Page 560: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.2.9.9 Monitored data Table 569: MFADPSDE Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between polarizing and operating quantity I_OPER FLOAT32 0.000...40.000 Calculated operating...
Page 561: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.1.2 Function block GUID-344CB768-7B5E-4BF4-B37D-0234E34D4A5A V1 EN Figure 301: Function block 4.3.1.3 Functionality The line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF is used as feeder differential protection for the distribution network lines and cables. LNPLDF includes low, stabilized and high, non-stabilized stages.
Page 562: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.3.1.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on" and "off". The function can also be set into test mode by setting the Operation setting to "test/ blocked".
Page 563 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Small steady state line charging current • In-zone transformer no load current • Impact of tap changer positions The timer is activated according to the calculated differential, stabilizing current and the set differential characteristic. PROT_ACTIVE ENABLE OPERATION (from Fail safe function)
Page 564 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Section 1 where 0.0 < I < End section 1. The differential current required for tripping is constant. The value of the differential current is the same as the basic setting (Low operate value) selected for the function. The basic setting allows the appearance of the no-load current of the line, the load current of the tapped load and minor inaccuracies of the current transformers.
Page 565 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-15D8FF39-A3DC-4B80-855A-3F817C09CB78 V1 EN Figure 305: Inrush current detection logic Differential calculation The operating principle is to calculate on both ends differential current from currents entering and leaving the protection zone by utilizing the digital communication channels for data exchange.
Page 566 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions calculation algorithms. The CT transformation ratio may be different and this needs to be compensated to provide a correct differential current calculation result on both ends. The operation characteristics related settings are given in units as percentage of the current transformer secondary nominal current on each line end protection relay.
Page 567 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Rated load of the power transformer Rated power of the power transformer Rated phase-to-phase voltage Next, the settings for the CT ratio correction can be calculated with the formula: CT ratio correction (Equation 91) GUID-10C49B76-7D13-486B-A65F-8A03655A5048 V1 EN Nominal primary current of the CT After the CT ratio correction, the measured currents and corresponding setting values...
Page 568 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions CT ratio correction (B) = 300 A / 274.9 A = 1.091 CT connections The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as “Type 1” and “Type 2”. • If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents are opposite, the CT connection type setting parameter is “Type 1”.
Page 569 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-82B6EC4A-A144-4152-81A7-50AA18C2746E V1 EN Figure 309: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 570 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-EDC00D1F-1278-4A6B-99E2-D9A3949DB07D V1 EN Figure 310: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 571 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-78D2E579-F114-451C-83D4-CD2E9EEC6D63 V1 EN Figure 311: Connection example of current transformers of Type 2 REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 572 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-903978C2-D0AC-4737-89DA-0BEA9CB30B9B V1 EN Figure 312: Connection example of current transformers of Type 2 Transformer vector group matching Before differential and bias currents can be calculated, the phase difference of the currents must be vector group matched based on the transformer connection type. The vector group of the power transformer is numerically matched on the high voltage and low voltage sides by means of the Winding selection, Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and Clock number settings.
Page 573 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions component can be selected for that winding by setting the Zro A elimination parameter. Winding selection setting defines the protection relay location respect to the transformer. If the protection relay is situated at the HV side of the transformer, then protection relay location setting is set to “Winding 1”...
Page 574 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions − − − − L mLV (Equation 96) GUID-607DB035-0F0D-4EAA-858E-6FA06E0A1A8E V1 EN − − − − L mLV (Equation 97) GUID-926E4327-8A74-44AB-BC63-819BFD1C3649 V1 EN The “Y” side currents stay untouched, while the “d” side currents are compensated to match the currents actually flowing in the windings.
Page 575 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero sequence transformer current elimination YNd1 (Automatic) Not needed YNd5 (Automatic) Not needed YNd7 (Automatic) Yd11 Not needed YNd11 (Automatic Not needed Not needed Not needed Not needed...
Page 576 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero sequence transformer current elimination ZNyn1 HV side ZNy1 (Automatic) Not needed Zyn5 (Automatic) ZNyn5 HV side ZNy5 (Automatic) Not needed Zyn7 (Automatic) ZNyn7 HV side...
Page 577 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero sequence transformer current elimination ZNz0 HV side ZNzn0 HV & LV side Zzn0 LV side Not needed ZNz2 (Automatic) ZNzn2 (Automatic) Zzn2 (Automatic) Not needed...
Page 578 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions sequence component on the star connected side that is earthed at its star point has to be eliminated by using the Zro A elimination parameter. The same parameter has to be used to eliminate the zero-sequence component if there is, for example, an earthing transformer on the delta-connected side of the “Ynd”...
Page 579 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions binary outputs are blocked. When the function is blocked, the direct inter-trip is also blocked. The PRO_ACTIVE output is always active when the protection function is capable of operating. PRO_ACTIVE can be used as a blocking signal for backup protection functions.
Page 580 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions are sent to the remote end via communication. The direct-intertripping of the line differential protection is included into LNPLDF. The OPERATE output combines the operate signals from both stages, local and remote, so that it can be used for the direct inter-trip signal locally.
Page 581 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions output is updated according to the BLOCK input status, as described in the Fail safe function chapter. The BLOCK and BLOCK_LS input statuses affect only the behavior of the local protection instance. When a line differential protection stage (stabilized low or instantaneous high) is blocked, also the received remote signals related to the corresponding stage are ignored (received direct inter-trip signals from the remote end).
Page 582: Commissioning
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-44AD2C9D-857C-4841-8AE7-AB75E2BE4569 V1 EN Figure 317: Operation during test operation of the line differential protection 4.3.1.6 Commissioning The commissioning of the line differential protection scheme would be difficult without any support features in the functionality because of the relatively long distance between the protection relays.
Page 583 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Therefore, before testing, check that the available terminal diagram corresponds to the protection relay. The circuit diagrams of the application are recommended to be available. These are required for checking the terminal block numbers of the current, trip, alarm and possibly other auxiliary circuits.
Page 584 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions for the proper operation of the directional function, protection or measurement in the protection relay. • CT secondary loop resistance measurement to confirm that the current transformer secondary loop DC resistance is within specification and that there are no high resistance joints in the CT winding or wiring.
Page 585 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Always check the binary output circuits from the protection relay to the equipment interface to make sure that all signals are connected correctly. If a particular output needs to be tested, the corresponding wiring can be disconnected from the terminal of the protection relay during testing.
Page 586 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions REX640 Breakable terminal blocks Test device TIMER STOP GUID-FF20B088-F129-456F-8E82-3DDD6D9A1034 V1 EN Figure 318: Example of connections to test the line differential protection relay Secondary current injection There are two alternative modes to check the operation of a line differential protection relay.
Page 587 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions When injecting current to one phase in the local end protection relay, the current is seen as a differential current at both ends. If a current I is injected, L1 in phase injected L1, the differential and stabilizing currents for phase L1 are: ID A I injected (Equation 101)
Page 588: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-7FC34CCB-60C2-415C-895E-1C63FD0874EC V1 EN Figure 319: An example of a test mode situation where three-phase currents are injected to the local end protection relay 4.3.1.7 Application LNPLDF is designed for the differential protection of overhead line and cable feeders in a distribution network.
Page 589 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions small distribution transformer is located at the tapped load. The usage of LNPLDF is not limited to these applications. GUID-33C0A9AC-4BE7-4694-89BC-270A45D998B8 V1 EN Figure 321: Line differential applications Communication supervision A typical line differential protection application includes LNPLDF as the main protection.
Page 590 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions PCSRTPC BLOCK LNPLDF UNBLOCK PHIPTOC UNBLOCK PHHPTOC(2) RED 615 PHHPTOC(1) PHLPTOC PCSRTPC BLOCK LNPLDF UNBLOCK RED 615 PHIPTOC UNBLOCK PHHPTOC(2) PHHPTOC(1) PHLPTOC PHLPTOC RED 615 PHHPTOC(1) PHIPTOC GUID-08B60EFC-8614-4986-ADBE-42DC25734245 V1 EN Figure 322: Protection communication supervision detects failures on communication In-zone transformer RED 615...
Page 591 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Τ ⋅ 3 (Equation 103) GUID-BAB5307B-F247-4420-B98E-DDCCFD2E80FD V1 EN The rated load current of the transformer on the HV side is 209.9 A (40 MW / (√3 × 110 kV)) and the rated load current of the transformer on the LV side is 1154.7 A (40 MW / (√3 ×...
Page 592 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions RED 615 RED 615 400A/1 400A/1 33kV 500kVA Z=10%                GUID-77AD6F06-C112-481C-BF8C-7F2ADBE4DD3E V1 EN Figure 325: Influence of the short circuit current at LV side of the tapped transformer to the differential current Detection of the inrush current during transformer start-up When the line is energized, the transformer magnetization inrush current is seen as...
Page 593: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions ID> BLOCKED ID> BLOCKED RED 615 RED 615 INRUSH BLKD2H_LOC GUID-FAED35DA-C75A-4FA2-9583-03457CFE0D0A V1 EN Figure 326: Blocking of line differential functions during detected transformer startup current If the protection stage is allowed to start during the inrush situation, the time delay can be selected so that the stabilized stage does not operate in the inrush situation.
Page 594: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 574: LNPLDF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate, local or remote, stabilized or instantaneous stage START BOOLEAN Start, local or remote STR_LS_LOC BOOLEAN Start stabilized stage local STR_LS_REM BOOLEAN Start stabilized stage remote OPR_LS_LOC BOOLEAN Operate stabilized stage local...
Page 595 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 576: LNPLDF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation mode of the function 4=test/blocked 5=off Winding selection 1=Not in use 1=Not in use IED location respect to transformer, HV 2=Winding 1 (Winding 1) side or LV (Winding 2) side 3=Winding 2...
Page 596: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.1.10 Monitored data Table 578: LNPLDF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time I_AMPL_LOC_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Local phase A amplitude after correction I_AMPL_LOC_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Local phase B amplitude...
Page 597: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description IL3-diff:1 FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured differential current amplitude phase IL1-bias:1 FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL1 IL2-bias:1 FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL2 IL3-bias:1 FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL3...
Page 598: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.2.2 Function block GUID-6F9B958C-EFD9-490D-BC42-7ADC2C161951 V1 EN Figure 327: Function block 4.3.2.3 Functionality The stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two-winding transformers function TR2PTDF is designed to protect two-winding transformers and generator- transformer blocks. TR2PTDF includes low biased and high instantaneous stages. The biased low stage provides a fast clearance of faults while remaining stable with high currents passing through the protected zone increasing errors on current measuring.
Page 599: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.3.2.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of TR2PTDF can be described by using a module diagram.
Page 600 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Winding 1 Winding 2 (usually HV) (usually LV) GUID-68EE91D0-8A52-4FF4-A963-82D0345C6F51 V1 EN Figure 329: Positive direction of the currents (Equation 104) GUID-C7B4A5EF-8C33-40AF-BB26-A360E26BCBB4 V1 EN In a normal situation, no fault occurs in the area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the currents are equal and the differential current I is zero.
Page 601 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The vector group matching can be implemented either on both, winding 1 and winding 2, or only on winding 1 or winding 2, at intervals of 30° with the Clock number setting. When the vector group matching is Yy0 and the CT connection type is according to "Type 2", the phase angle of the phase currents connected to the protection relay does not change.
Page 602 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Zero-sequence component elimination If Clock number is "Clk Num 2", "Clk Num 4", "Clk Num 8" or "Clk Num 10", the vector group matching is always done on both, winding 1 and winding 2. The combination results in the correct compensation.
Page 603 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Compensation of tap changer position The position of the tap changer used for voltage control can be compensated and the position information is provided for the protection function through the tap position indication function TPOSYLTC. Typically, the tap changer is located within the high voltage winding, that is, winding 1, of the power transformer.
Page 604 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The position value is available through the Monitored data view on LHMI or through other communication tools in the tap position indication function. When the quality of the TAP_POS value is not good, the position information in TAP_POS is not used but the last value with the good quality information is used instead.
Page 605 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions stage on the concerned phase is blocked if the weighted ratio of that phase is above the set blocking limit Start value 2.H and if blocking is enabled through the Restraint mode parameter. Using separate blocking for the individual phases and weighted averages calculated for the separate phases provides a blocking scheme that is stable at the connection inrush currents.
Page 606 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-5D9C2435-8318-461B-81C7-870C60358E9A V1 EN Figure 331: The limits and operation of the fifth harmonic blocking when both blocking and deblocking features are enabled using the Harmonic deblock 5.H control parameter. The fifth harmonic blocking has a hysteresis to avoid rapid fluctuation between "TRUE"...
Page 607 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The differential current caused by CT errors or tap changer positions increases at the same percent ratio as the load current. In the protection of generators, the false differential current can be caused by various factors.
Page 608 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The operating characteristic of the biased low stage is determined by Low operate value, Slope section 2 and the setting of the second turning point of the operating characteristic curve, End section 2 (the first turning point is fixed). The settings are the same for all the phases.
Page 609 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Slope section 2 and Slope section 3 are determined correspondingly: Slope section ⋅ (Equation 110) GUID-E1E5BC13-9850-4312-B905-19D413B43490 V1 EN Slope section ⋅ (Equation 111) GUID-76E8AB62-055A-4E14-B205-8199401EB347 V1 EN The second turning point End section 2 can be set in the range of 100 percent to 500 percent.
Page 610 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-606FA7E6-185B-4515-AE35-37A2314AEF81 V1 EN Figure 334: Setting range for biased low stage If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current of the phase angle between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a normal situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has most likely occurred in the area protected by TR2PTDF.
Page 611 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-C8309980-C697-490D-8274-7B23DF7A2490 V1 EN Figure 335: Operating characteristics of the protection. (LS) stands for the biased low stage and (HS) for the instantaneous high stage The OPERATE output is activated always when the OPR_HS output activates. The internal blocking signals of the differential function do not prevent the operate signal of the instantaneous differential current stage.
Page 612: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions however, reset the counters holding the blockings, so the blocking signals may return when these conditions are not valid anymore. External blocking functionality TR2PTDF has three inputs for blocking. • When the BLOCK input is active ("TRUE"), the operation of the function is blocked but measurement output signals are still updated.
Page 613 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions the phase shift and turns ratio. The numerical microprocessor based differential algorithm implemented in TR2PTDF compensates for both the turns ratio and the phase shift internally in the software. The differential current should theoretically be zero during normal load or external faults if the turns ratio and the phase shift are correctly compensated.
Page 614 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions this requires the interposing CTs to handle the vector group and/or ratio mismatch between the two windings/feeders. The accuracy limit factor for the interposing CT must fulfill the same requirements as the main CTs. Please note that the interposing CT imposes an additional burden to the main CTs.
Page 615 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-0BCC5A98-15E9-4025-8E80-2CFF512127DD V1 EN Figure 339: Protection of the power transformer feeding the frequency converter Transforming ratio correction of CTs The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of the power transformer.
Page 616 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions CT ratio correction = (Equation 113) GUID-98F577FA-67F5-4EA6-8211-D9D9745896B7 V1 EN nominal primary current of the CT Next, the settings for the CT ratio correction can be calculated. After the CT ratio correction, the measured currents and corresponding setting values of TR2PTDF are expressed in multiples of the rated power transformer current I or percentage value of I The rated input current (1A or 5A) of the relay does not have to be same for the HV...
Page 617 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group matching and elimination of the zero-sequence component The vector group of the power transformer is numerically matched on the high voltage and low voltage sides by means of the Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and Clock number settings.
Page 618 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer YNd5 Clk Num 5 Not needed Clk Num 7 Not needed YNd7 Clk Num 7 Not needed Yd11 Clk Num 11 Not needed YNd11...
Page 619 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer Clk Num 5 Not needed Zyn5 Clk Num 5 Not needed ZNyn5 Clk Num 5 HV side ZNy5 Clk Num 5 Not needed Clk Num 7...
Page 620 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer Zzn0 Clk Num 0 LV side Clk Num 2 Not needed ZNz2 Clk Num 2 Not needed ZNzn2 Clk Num 2 Not needed Zzn2...
Page 621 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer YNyn8 Clk Num 8 Not needed Yyn8 Clk Num 8 Not needed Yy10 Clk Num 10 Not needed YNy10 Clk Num 10 Not needed...
Page 622 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer Yzn7 Clk Num 7 Not needed Yz11 Clk Num 11 Not needed YNz11 Clk Num 11 Not needed YNzn11 Clk Num 11 LV side...
Page 623 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-1B4F8735-D81E-4FC8-9A50-B5499CE5D463 V1 EN Figure 341: Low voltage test arrangement. The three-phase low voltage source can be the station service transformer. The Tapped winding control setting parameter has to be set to “Not in use” to make sure that the monitored current values are not scaled by the automatic adaptation to the tap changer position.
Page 624: Ct Connections And Transformation Ratio Correction
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions is set to "Clk num 0", the resulting connection group "Yd0" is not a supported combination. All the non-supported combinations of Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and Clock number settings result in the default connection group compensation that is "Yy0".
Page 625 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-0DE4E628-0213-4168-881A-83D3B62D6067 V1 EN Figure 342: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 626 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-D8929034-7AE8-4062-892F-DC600587BC15 V1 EN Figure 343: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 1 REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 627 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-681A69BA-50DA-47AD-99CB-4E83CA947AAF V1 EN Figure 344: Connection of current transformers of Type 2 and example of the currents during an external fault REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 628: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-FEBF3DEF-30BB-4A88-B8A6-BFED274DE6A8 V1 EN Figure 345: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 2 The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of the power transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides of the power transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 settings.
Page 629: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 583: TR2PTDF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate combined OPR_LS BOOLEAN Operate from low set OPR_HS BOOLEAN Operate from high set BLKD2H BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic restraint block status BLKD5H BOOLEAN 5th harmonic restraint block status BLKDWAV BOOLEAN Waveform blocking status...
Page 630 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 586: TR2PTDF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off/On 5=off CT connection type 1=Type 1 1=Type 1 CT connection type. Determined by the 2=Type 2 directions of the connected current transformers Winding 1 type...
Page 631: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.2.10 Monitored data Table 588: TR2PTDF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase A 1=True OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase B 1=True OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase C 1=True BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN...
Page 632 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_AMPL_A1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase A I_AMPL_B1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase B I_AMPL_C1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase C I_AMPL_A2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00...
Page 633: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_ANGL_B1_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between winding 1 and 2, phase B I_ANGL_C1_C2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between winding 1 and 2, phase C I_5H_RAT_A FLOAT32 0.00...1.00...
Page 634: Stabilized And Instantaneous Differential Protection For Two- Or Three-Winding Transformers Tr3Ptdf
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.3 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two- or three-winding transformers TR3PTDF 4.3.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Stabilized and instantaneous differential TR3PTDF 3dI>3W 87T3 protection for two- or three-winding transformers 4.3.3.2 Function block...
Page 635: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.3.4 Analog channel configuration TR3PTDF has three analog group inputs which must be properly configured. Table 590: Analog inputs Input Description I3P1 Three-phase currents I3P2 Three-phase currents Three-phase currents I3P3 Current group 3 type is other Necessary when than "Not in use"...
Page 636 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Differential I_A1 calculation I_B1 I3P1 I_C1 Transformer vector group matching I_A2 Instantaneo I_B2 us high OPERATE I3P2 Zero-sequence stage I_C2 component elimination OPR_HS I_A3 I_B3 I3P3 Compensation OPR_LS I_C3 of tap changer position TAP_POS BLK_OPR_HS BLOCK BLK_OPR_LS...
Page 637 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The normalized amplitude of the differential current per phase I is obtained using the equation: (Equation 114) GUID-89889428-E10F-46B1-9BF7-6341C39CB32E V1 EN In a normal situation, no fault occurs in the area protected by TR3PTDF. Then the currents I and I cancel each other and the differential current I...
Page 638 3 in case of a three-winding transformer) that are caused by the vector groups of the power transformer are numerically compensated in the function. Phase difference matching is based on the ABB-patented generalized transform- method. Settings Phase shift Wnd 1-2 and Phase shift Wnd 1-3 determine the current phase angle difference between windings 1 and 2 and between 1 and 3, respectively.
Page 639 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions fault in the network is seen as differential current unless the zero-sequence component is correctly eliminated. The zero-sequence elimination is done with the Zro A elimination setting. The recommended rules for this setting are: •...
Page 640 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions tap position information is corrupted, the automatic tap changer position adaptation does not try to adapt to any unrealistic position values. (HV) (LV) Max winding tap Tap nominal Min winding tap GUID-30DEED19-FDFF-4102-94E8-C3E64A0235BC V1 EN Figure 349: Simplified presentation of the HV and LV windings of a two-winding transformer with demonstration of the settings Max winding tap, Min...
Page 641 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions energization of another transformer running in parallel with the protected transformer already connected to the network. The ratio of the second harmonic to the fundamental component can vary considerably between the phases. Especially when the delta compensation is done for a Ynd1-connected transformer and the two phases of the inrush currents are otherwise equal but opposite in phase angle, their subtraction in a delta compensation results in a very small second harmonic component.
Page 642 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions harmonic content / % of fundamental Stop value 5. H hysteresis Start value 5. H hysteresis 5 th harmonic block GUID-D9C39F1B-8F17-4EEA-B740-E9E88B6B69E1 V1 EN Figure 350: The fifth harmonic blocking limits and the operation when both blocking and deblocking features are enabled through the Harmonic deblock 5.
Page 643 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Biased low stage Biasing of the current differential protection is needed since a possible appearance of a differential current can also be due to something else than an actual fault in the transformer (or generator). In the case of transformer protection, there can be several reasons for the false differential current.
Page 644 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-E0C8B330-8C8B-4A05-8419-DE3552107FB2 V1 EN Figure 351: Operation logic of the biased low stage The high currents passing through a protected object can be caused by the short circuits outside the protected area, the large currents fed by the transformer in a motor startup or transformer inrush situations.
Page 645 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The BLKD5H output is activated when the biased low stage is blocked by the fifth harmonic blocking functionality. Correspondingly, when the operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the waveform blocking functionality, the BLKDWAV output is activated according to the phase information.
Page 646 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 592: Different sections of the range and their operation Sections Operation Section 1 In section 1, where 0 percent Ir < Ib < End section 1, with End section 1 being fixed to 50 percent of Ir, the differential current required for tripping is constant. The value Low operate value selected for the of the differential current is the same as the function.
Page 647 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions has most certainly occurred in the area protected by the differential protection relay. The internal blocking signals of the biased stage are inhibited. The operation of the differential protection is based on the fundamental frequency components.
Page 648: Current Transformer Connections And Transformation Ratio Correction
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Fault in protected area OPERATE (from Differential calculation) OPR_HS (from Differential calculation) BLOCK BLK_OPR_HS High operate value GUID-7EF90412-1C26-4221-BF17-83FC11E3536F V1 EN Figure 355: Operation logic of Instantaneous high stage External blocking functionality TR3PTDF has three inputs for blocking. Blocking inputs Description When active (TRUE), the operation of the function is blocked;...
Page 649 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A GUID-5AA98439-77BC-4902-81B4-DF360AD3ECD2 V2 EN Figure 356: Connection of current transformers of Type 1 and example of currents during an external fault 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A...
Page 650: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Wnd 1, CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 and CT ratio Cor 3 must be used to correct the transformation ratios. CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 are used to correct the ratios on winding 1 and 2 while the use of CT ratio Cor 3 depends on the setting Current group 3 type.
Page 651 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Mismatch due to varying tap changer positions • Different characteristics, loads and operating conditions of the CTs • Zero-sequence currents that flow only on one side of the power transformer • Normal magnetizing currents •...
Page 652 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions In three-winding transformer applications, currents from winding 3 are always connected to the third three-phase current input set of the protection relay (Current group 3 type to be set as "Winding 3"). In the normal two-winding transformer application with one set of three-phase currents on both sides of the transformer, the Current group 3 type setting must be set as "Not in use".
Page 653 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-D5A18417-F6DE-4335-A47F-602D554A1BBC V1 EN Figure 360: Example of two-winding power transformer differential protection The rated load of the transformer can be calculated. = 25 MVA / (1.732 ⋅ 110 kV) = 131.2 A HV side: I nT_Wnd1 = 25 MVA / (1.732 ⋅...
Page 654 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Commissioning The settings for the connection group compensation (CT connection 1-2, Phase shift Wnd 1-2 and, in case of a three-winding transformer, also CT connection 1-3 and Phase shift Wnd 1-3 settings) can be verified by monitoring the angle values (I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1, I_ANGL_C1_A1, I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2, I_ANGL_C2_A2, I_ANGL_A1_A2, I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 and in case of three-winding transformer also I_ANGL_A3_B3,...
Page 655 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions values I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2 and I_ANGL_C2_A2 show -120°, the phase order is wrong on winding 2, for example, the low-voltage side. If the angle values I_ANGL_A3_B3, I_ANGL_B3_C3 and I_ANGL_C3_A3 show -120°, the phase order is wrong on winding 3, for example, the tertiary side. If the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1 and I_ANGL_C1_A1 do not show the same value (+120°), the polarity of one current transformer may be wrong.
Page 656 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Angle output name Angle value Possible reason if not OK I_ANGL_A2_B2 +120 I_ANGL_B2_C2 +120 I_ANGL_C2_A2 +120 I_ANGL_A3_B3 +120 I_ANGL_B3_C3 +120 I_ANGL_C3_A3 +120 I_ANGL_A1_A2 Winding 1 phase B connected as phase A I_ANGL_B1_B2 Winding 1 phase A connected as phase B I_ANGL_C1_C2 ±180 I_ANGL_A1_A3...
Page 657: Recommendations For Current Transformers
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 596: Angle outputs when settings CT connection 1-2 and CT connection 1-3 match the actual CT connections on windings 1, 2 and 3 but the phase B polarity is wrong compared to other phases on winding 2 Angle output name Angle value Possible reason if not OK...
Page 658 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Example 1 In the example, the rated burden S of the CTs 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated current 5A, the internal resistance R = 0.07 Ω and the accuracy limit factor F (ALF) corresponding to the rated burden is 20 (5P20).
Page 659 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Two typical cases considered for the determination of the sufficient accuracy limit factor (F ) are a fault occurring at the substation bus and re-energizing against a fault occurring further down in the network. A fault occurring at the substation bus The protection must be stable when a fault occurs during a normal operating situation.
Page 660: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If the actual burden of the current transformer (S ) in Equation 120 cannot be reduced enough to provide a sufficient value for F , there are two alternatives. • A current transformer with a higher rated burden S can be chosen (which also means a higher rated accuracy limit F ) or...
Page 661: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 598: TR3PTDF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate combined OPR_LS BOOLEAN Operate from low set OPR_HS BOOLEAN Operate from high set BLKD2H BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic restraint block status BLKD5H BOOLEAN 5th harmonic restraint block status BLKDWAV BOOLEAN Waveform blocking status...
Page 662 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 601: TR3PTDF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off/On 5=off Current group 3 type 1=Not in use 2=Winding 3 Type of the third set/group of current 2=Winding 3 inputs 3=Wnd 1 restraint...
Page 663: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.3.11 Monitored data Table 602: TR3PTDF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase A 1=True OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase B 1=True OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase C 1=True BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN...
Page 664 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_AMPL_A1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase A I_AMPL_B1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase B I_AMPL_C1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase C I_AMPL_A2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00...
Page 665 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_ANGL_A1_B1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle phase A to B, winding 1 I_ANGL_B1_C1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle phase B to C, winding 1 I_ANGL_C1_A1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle phase C to A, winding 1 I_ANGL_A2_B2 FLOAT32...
Page 666: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description IL1-bias:1 FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL1 IL2-bias:1 FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL2 IL3-bias:1 FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL3 4.3.3.12 Technical data Table 603: TR3PTDF Technical data...
Page 667: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.4.3 Functionality The numerical stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault protection function LREFPNDF for a two-winding transformer is based on the numerically stabilized differential current principle. No external stabilizing resistor or non-linear resistor are required. The fundamental components of the currents are used for calculating the residual current of the phase currents, the neutral current, differential currents and stabilizing currents.
Page 668 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The operation of LREFPNDF can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer OPERATE Earth fault detector START IRES Second BLK2H harmonic blocking BLOCK GUID-CFC6C9E6-AC71-460E-8175-46FEDDB86D7A V1 EN Figure 363:...
Page 669 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions analog input settings) is taken into account by the function with the properly set analog input setting values. During an earth fault in the protected area, the currents ΣI and Io are directed towards the protected area.
Page 670 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-345732C2-CB61-4BF2-A9C5-26B5C5275AE2 V1 EN Figure 365: Setting range of the operating characteristics for the stabilized differential current principle of the earth-fault protection function The Operate value setting is used for defining the characteristics of the function. The differential current value required for tripping is constant at the stabilizing current values 0.0 <...
Page 671: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The second harmonic blocking is disabled when Restraint mode is set to "None" and enabled when set to "Harmonic2". Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum operate time, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 672 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions current is provided to the differential element to detect the earth fault in the transformer winding based on the numerical stabilized differential current principle. Connection of current transformers The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as "Type 1" and "Type 2".
Page 673 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-A2EDE3D7-8102-4AF5-8E4D-8CFF6A421022 V1 EN Figure 367: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external earth-fault situation. Both earthings are outside the area to be protected.
Page 674 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-2FA7824D-3042-4CF4-AAC5-03E49E8E86B6 V1 EN Figure 369: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2. The phase currents and the neutral current have equal directions at an external earth- fault situation. Phase earthing is outside and neutral earthing is inside the area to be protected.
Page 675 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions zone of protection a = 0 b = 0 b = 0 c = 0 For external fault Reference is Neutral Current Operate for Restrain for internal fault external fault GUID-D735D14D-0AC9-4F9E-BB74-2E072FD8CE51 V1 EN Figure 370: Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault zone of protection...
Page 676: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions LREFPNDF does not respond to phase-to-phase faults either, as in this case the fault current flows between the two line CTs and so the neutral CT does not experience this fault current. Blocking based on the second harmonic of the neutral current The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when the transformer is energized after a period of de-energization.
Page 677: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 609: LREFPNDF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 40...300000 Minimum operate time Restraint mode 1=None 1=None Restraint mode 2=Harmonic2 Start value 2.H 10...50 The ratio of the 2. harmonic to fundamental component required for blocking Table 610:...
Page 678: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.4.10 Technical data Table 613: LREFPNDF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±2.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x I Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 679: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself. 4.3.5.4 Analog channel configuration HREFPDIF has one analog group input which must be properly configured. Table 614: Analog inputs Input Description...
Page 680: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum operate time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated.
Page 681 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Stabilizing Resistor High impedance protection (HREFPDIF) GUID-5E9C7D3D-656B-4736-BCFE-F4AD96F2B805 V1 EN Figure 374: Connection scheme for the restricted earth-fault protection according to the high-impedance principle High-impedance principle High-impedance principle is stable for all types of faults outside the zone of protection.
Page 682 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-8442A488-EFE9-40C2-AF7E-4F12E99CAB0B V1 EN Figure 375: High-impedance principle The stability of the protection is based on the use of the stabilizing resistor (Rs) and the fact that the impedance of the CT secondary quickly decreases as the CT saturates. The magnetization reactance of a fully saturated CT goes to zero and the impedance is formed only by the resistance of the winding (R ) and lead resistance (R...
Page 683: The Measuring Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions At internal fault, the secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs, connection wires and protection relay. To limit this voltage, a voltage- dependent resistor VDR is used as shown in Figure 375.
Page 684 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions recommended that all current transformers have an equal burden and characteristics and are of same type, preferably from the same manufacturing batch, that is, an identical construction should be used. If the CT characteristics and burden values are not equal, calculation for each branch in the scheme should be done separately and the worst-case result is then used.
Page 685 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions (Equation 130) GUID-A578FB88-D2B1-4EEC-9397-78F3D05823BE V1 EN the resistance of the stabilizing resistor the stabilizing voltage of the protection relay the value of the Operate value setting in secondary amps. The stabilizing resistor should be capable to dissipate high energy within a very short time;...
Page 686 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • Small power transformers: I = 16 x I (corresponds to z = 6% and kmax infinite grid) • Large power transformers: I = 12 x I (corresponds to z = 8% and kmax infinite grid) •...
Page 687 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions First, voltage U , ignoring the CT saturation during the fault, is calculated with the equation ⋅ ≈ ⋅ (Equation 134) GUID-C3B7E72F-852E-4707-8E45-0C0BA3F89754 V1 EN the maximum fault current inside the zone, in primary amps kmaxin the turns ration of the CT the internal resistance of the CT in ohms...
Page 688: Setting Examples
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.5.9 Setting examples Example 1 GUID-5E04A1BA-CEC9-4B4D-97C8-F20ABBACCBC9 V1 EN Figure 377: Restricted earth-fault protection of a transformer The data for the protected power transformer are: = 20 MVA = 11 kV The longest distance of the secondary circuit is 50 m (the whole loop is 100 m) and the area of the cross section is 10 mm / (√3 ·...
Page 689 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 12600 0 26 0 18 ⋅ ≈ (Equation 136) GUID-829B26A6-9EE9-4AF0-94AC-95E37D2F91C6 V1 EN According to the criterion, the value of U should be 2 · U = 2 · 23 V = 46 V. It depends on if the stability of the scheme is achieved with U = 40 V.
Page 690 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Example 2a GUID-58798798-AF49-4235-91A2-17B450382F7C V1 EN Figure 378: Restricted earth-fault protection of a generator In the protected generator: = 8 MVA = 6 kV. = 770 A = 6 · I = 6 · 770 A = 4620 A kmax In this example, the CT type is KOFD 12 A 21 with: = 1000 A (value given by the manufacturer).
Page 691: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The required knee-point voltage can be calculated using equation = 2 · ( 4620 A / 1000 ) · ( 15.3 + 1.46 ) ≈ 155 V. The value 155 V is lower than the value 323 V, which means that the value of U high enough.
Page 692: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 616: HREFPDIF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.3.5.11 Settings Table 617: HREFPDIF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate value 1.0...50.0 Low operate value, percentage of the nominal current Minimum operate time 40...300000...
Page 693: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.5.13 Technical data Table 621: HREFPDIF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 694: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions However, the function can also be used for providing generator, motor, transformer and reactor protection. The function starts and operates when the differential current exceeds the set limit. The operate time characteristics are according to definite time (DT). The function contains a blocking functionality.
Page 695 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Timer START Level detector OPERATE Blocking BLOCK logic Timer Timer START Level detector OPERATE Blocking BLOCK logic Timer Timer START Level detector OPERATE Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-B1BA43AA-0ED9-4C90-B564-C0268770C4E1 V2 EN Figure 380: Functional module diagram The module diagram illustrates all the phases of the function.
Page 696: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer calculates the start duration START_DUR value, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. The activation of the BLOCK input resets Timer and deactivates the START and OPERATE outputs.
Page 697 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-C6E44B83-5126-42A6-9C23-C81F7C0679CE V1 EN Figure 381: Phase-segregated bus differential protection based on high- impedance principle CT secondary winding resistances (R ) and connection wire resistances (R /2) are also shown in Figure 382. Figure 382 demonstrates a simplified circuit consisting only of one incoming and outgoing feeder.
Page 698 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-1FE64A73-2018-487B-AAE4-837085F24127 V1 EN Figure 382: Equivalent circuit when there is no fault or CT saturation When there is no fault, the CT secondary currents and their emf voltages, E and E are opposite and the protection relay measuring branch has no voltage or current. If an in-zone fault occurs, the secondary currents have the same direction.
Page 699 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions can be presented as a short circuit. When one CT is saturated, the current of the non- saturated CT follows two paths, one through the protection relay measuring branch + relay) and the other through the saturated CT (R The protection relay must not operate during the saturation.
Page 700 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs, connection wires and the protection relay because of the stabilizing resistance and CT saturation. A voltage dependent resistor (VDR, R ) is used to limit the voltage as shown in Figure 381.
Page 701 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-9FE4E775-DFB3-4017-BAD0-028E1CAAE3BF V1 EN Figure 386: Phase-segregated single busbar protection employing high- impedance differential protection Figure 387 shows an example for a system consisting of two busbar section coupled with a bus coupler. Each busbar section consists of two feeders and both sections are provided with a separate differential protection to form different zones.
Page 702: Example Calculations For Busbar High-Impedance Differential Protection
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in any busbar section, the difference current is no longer zero and the protection operates. GUID-9EB74EDD-C063-477D-BDAF-006AF2795BEC V1 EN Figure 387: Differential protection on busbar with bus coupler (Single-phase representation) 4.3.6.7 Example calculations for busbar high-impedance differential protection The protected object in the example for busbar differential protection is a single-bus system with two zones of protection.
Page 703 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-A59B0E04-AC24-4382-B610-6E39697085FA V1 EN Figure 388: Example for busbar differential protection Bus data: 20 kV 2000 A 25 kA kmax 10 feeders per protected zone including bus coupler and incomer. CT data is assumed to be: 2000/1 A 15.75 Ω...
Page 704 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The stabilizing voltage is calculated using the formula: 25000 15 75 209 37 ⋅ Ω Ω ≈ 2000 (Equation 141) GUID-52310FE0-8E97-458B-B3DF-84E20C9892DA V1 EN In this case, the requirement for the current transformer knee point voltage is fulfilled because U >...
Page 705: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Based on Equation 149 Equation 150, the need for voltage-dependent resistor is checked. 25000 5900 15 75 1 00 74 0 ⋅ Ω Ω Ω ≈ 2000 (Equation 149) GUID-63F650BB-E811-49BC-A9F1-9C6A70277FFB V1 EN ˘ 2 436 74000 16 0 = ⋅...
Page 706: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 626: HIAPDIF Output signals Name Type Description START BOOLEAN Start OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate Table 627: HIBPDIF Output signals Name Type Description START BOOLEAN Start OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate Table 628: HICPDIF Output signals Name Type Description START...
Page 707: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 633: HIBPDIF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Table 634: HIBPDIF Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time...
Page 708: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 639: HIBPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time HIBPDIF Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 640: HICPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 709: Stabilized And Instantaneous Differential Protection For Machines Mpdif
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.7 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for machines MPDIF 4.3.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Stabilized and instantaneous differential MPDIF 3dI>G/M 87M/87G protection for machines 4.3.7.2 Function block GUID-E0B32BFF-96AA-42C3-A37C-6776190C48A1 V1 EN Figure 389:...
Page 710: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 711 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions (Equation 153) GUID-8369B262-E7A2-4CF5-87BE-DC778CBCDA48 V1 EN During normal conditions, there is no fault in the area protected by the function block, so the currents are equal and the differential current I = 0. However, in practice some differential current exists due to inaccuracies in the current transformer on the phase and neutral sides, but it is very small during normal conditions.
Page 712 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions DC component detection On detection of a DC component, the function temporarily desensitizes the differential protection. The functioning of this module depends on the DC restrain Enable setting. The DC components are continuously extracted from the three instantaneous differential currents.
Page 713 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Low operatevalue (Equation 155) GUID-83F35A9F-A85C-48D0-94AB-94540AD3B228 V1 EN The Slope section 2 and Slope section 3 settings are determined correspondingly: Slope section ⋅ (Equation 156) GUID-62E58877-B39C-4F26-AE7E-D2DC7F011288 V1 EN Slope section ⋅ (Equation 157) GUID-5C3BF765-9028-4605-A66D-B572C1D59814 V1 EN The end of the first section End section 1 can be set at a desired point within the range of 0 to 100 percent (or % I ).
Page 714 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions When the differential current exceeds the operating value determined by the operating characteristics, the OPR_LS output is activated. The OPERATE output is always activated when the OPR_LS output activates. The operate signal due to the biased stage can be blocked by the activation of the BLK_OPR_LS or BLOCK input.
Page 715: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-8CB941C0-A958-46AF-A509-C10AEE534324 V1 EN Figure 392: Operating characteristic for the stabilized stage of the generator differential protection function 4.3.7.6 Application The differential protection works on the principle of calculating the differential current at the two ends of the winding, that is, the current entering the winding is compared to the current exiting the winding.
Page 716 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions contributions from both the external power system (via the machine or the block circuit breaker) and from the machine itself must be disconnected as fast as possible. The DC restraint feature should be used in case of an application with a long DC time constant in the fault currents is present.
Page 717 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Example 1 The rated burden S of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated current 5A, the internal resistance R = 0.07 Ω and the rated accuracy limit factor F corresponding to the rated burden is 20 (5P20). The internal burden of the current transformer is S = (5A)²...
Page 718 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The required minimum time-to-saturate T in MPDIF is half-fundamental cycle period (10 ms when f = 50 Hz). Two typical cases are considered for the determination of the sufficient actual accuracy limit factor F A fault occurring at the substation bus.
Page 719 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions = 1/(1-0.4) = 1.6667 Equation 162 with these values gives the result: − K Ik ω > ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ − ≈ (Equation 164) GUID-E4669D94-4DDB-4BF4-81FC-52FA7CEDBD18 V1 EN If the actual burden of the current transformer S in the accuracy limit factor equation cannot be reduced low enough to provide a sufficient value for F , there are two...
Page 720 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Connection of current transformers The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as Type 1 and Type 2. • If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents are opposite, the CT connection type is of "Type 1".
Page 721 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-344A0649-C688-49A0-AD3E-83BFCA1C0EE9 V1 EN Figure 394: Connection of current transformer of Type 1, example 2 REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 722 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-323E1BA3-A73F-46AB-AFEC-C6EB4D6B5516 V1 EN Figure 395: Connection of current transformer of Type 2, example 1 GUID-E59904D9-A886-4ED4-99A9-E149BFA2F5CE V1 EN Figure 396: Connection of current transformer of Type 2, example 2 REX640 Technical Manual...
Page 723 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Saturation of current transformers There are basically two types of saturation phenomena that have to be detected: the AC saturation and the DC saturation. The AC saturation is caused by a high fault current where the CT magnetic flux exceeds its maximum value. As a result, the secondary current is distorted as shown in Figure 397.
Page 724: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.7.7 Signals Table 643: MPDIF Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P1 SIGNAL Three-phase currents 1 I3P2 SIGNAL Three-phase currents 2 BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks operate outputs from biased stage BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN...
Page 725: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 647: MPDIF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off CT connection type 1=Type 1 1=Type 1 CT connection type. Determined by the 2=Type 2 directions of the connected current transformers...
Page 726: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_ANGL_A1_A2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between line and neutral side, Phase A I_ANGL_B1_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between line and neutral side, Phase B I_ANGL_C1_C2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00...
Page 727: High-Impedance Or Flux-Balance Based Differential Protection Mhzpdif
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.8 High-impedance or flux-balance based differential protection MHZPDIF 4.3.8.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number High-impedance or flux-balance based MHZPDIF 3dIHi>M 87HIM differential protection 4.3.8.2 Function block GUID-58AF7576-A335-45F6-9DD6-A84C17EC4A66 V1 EN Figure 399: Function block...
Page 728: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.3.8.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of MHZPDIF can be described using a module diagram.
Page 729 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions High-impedance principle The high-impedance principle is stable for all types of faults outside the protection zone. The stabilization is obtained by a stabilizing resistor in the differential circuit. This method requires all the CTs to have a similar magnetizing characteristic, same ratio and a relatively high knee point voltage.
Page 730 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-1F4F2F21-06DD-42C4-85FE-738FCB562444 V1 EN Figure 402: Secondary waveform of a saturated CT At an internal fault, the secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs, connection wires and the protection relay. To limit this voltage, a voltage-dependent resistor (VDR) is used.
Page 731: Recommendations For Current Transformers
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-FB11FEE8-6FFD-4539-BA9F-56695DFB82E5 V1 EN Figure 403: Three-phase differential protection for motors based on flux- balancing principle The advantage of this scheme is that the CT rated primary current can be selected smaller than the rated current of the machine. If six current transformers are used, the flux-balancing principle, that is, summing two CTs in each phase, cannot be used.
Page 732 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-CF8466CA-3596-4DF6-AE35-2BDB60E1FD1C V1 EN Figure 404: High-impedance differential protection with different CT burden value on each branch The stabilizing voltage, that is the voltage appearing across the measuring branch during an out-of-zone fault, is calculated assuming that one of the CTs connected in parallel is fully saturated.
Page 733 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions ≥ ⋅ 2 (Equation 167) GUID-64246F42-F47E-40EF-A9BA-105985045991 V1 EN Knee point voltage Stabilizing voltage The factor two is used when delay in the operating time of the protection is not acceptable in any situation. It is advisable to use current transformers whose secondary winding resistance is of the same size as the resistance of the measuring loop to prevent the knee point voltage from growing too high.
Page 734 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions = ⋅ ⋅ prim (Equation 170) GUID-820A4662-D315-4DA6-8262-AF1A0FE2B1CF V1 EN The magnetizing current per current transformer at U voltage The primary current level at which the protection is to start prim Operate value setting The value of The leakage current through the VDR at U voltage Turn ratio of the current transformer...
Page 735 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions voltage stated in the formulas. However, the network conditions have to be known well enough to ensure the stability. • If U ≥ 2 · U , the fast relay operation is secure. • If U ≥...
Page 736: Example Calculations For High-Impedance Differential Protection
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions As the peak voltage ȗ = 3.2 kV, VDR must be used. In some cases, VDR can be avoided if R is smaller. The value of R depends on the protection relay operation current and stabilizing voltage. Thus, a higher setting in the protection relay must be used or the stabilizing voltage lowered.
Page 737 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-96BACB22-3697-4039-B961-BCA4C418F954 V1 EN Figure 405: Example calculation for high-impedance differential protection (only one phase is presented in detail) The length of the secondary circuit loop is 200 m and the area of the cross-section is 2.5 mm .
Page 738 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The setting current I should be at the minimum of the sum of the magnetizing currents of all connected CTs to obtain adequate protection stability. 2 8 5 = ⋅ ≈ (Equation 180) GUID-C367812A-85D1-43B4-8BA5-10CABC70BE53 V1 EN The resistance of the stabilizing resistor is calculated based on Equation 168.
Page 739: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The sensitivity of the protection can be re-calculated taking into account the leakage current through the varistor as per Equation 170. 1000 0 020 2 0 0085 0 002 ⋅ + ⋅ ≈ prim (Equation 188) GUID-59E56BFE-FD64-493B-96F0-0F412D1B4F62 V1 EN 4.3.8.9...
Page 740: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.3.8.11 Monitored data Table 658: MHZPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time ID_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current phase ID_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current phase ID_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00...
Page 741: Unbalance Protection
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Unbalance protection 4.4.1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC 4.4.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC I2>M protection 4.4.1.2 Function block GUID-54970174-F441-4070-9375-9B3A52A17FAC V1 EN Figure 406: Function block 4.4.1.3 Functionality...
Page 742: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 660: Analog signals Input Description Three-phase currents See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 743 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Once activated, Timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 744: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode. The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated.
Page 745: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.4.1.8 Settings Table 663: NSPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.01...5.00 0.01 0.30 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Time multiplier 0.025...15.000 0.005 1.000...
Page 746: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 666: NSPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time 4.4.1.9 Monitored data Table 667: NSPTOC Monitored data Name...
Page 747: Directional Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection Dnspdoc
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.4.2 Directional negative-sequence overcurrent protection DNSPDOC 4.4.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Directional negative-sequence DNSPDOC I2> -> overcurrent protection 4.4.2.2 Function block GUID-725D5512-14E0-401C-AB19-5B6D816ADB0C V1 EN Figure 408: Function block 4.4.2.3 Functionality...
Page 748: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. The GRPOFF signal is available in the function block called Protection. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 670: Special conditions Condition...
Page 749 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Irrespective of the operating quantity selected, directional calculation is always determined using the negative-sequence current. Directional calculation Directional calculation compares the negative-sequence current phasor with the negative-sequence voltage phasor, that is, the polarizing quantity. The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting.
Page 750: Directional Overcurrent Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program.
Page 751 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions RCA = + 60 deg Max forward angle Min reverse angle Backward Forward area area Min forward angle Max reverse angle GUID-D2B2E8AB-4C2F-42D3-B00D-F0622D3E1540 V1 EN Figure 410: Configurable operating sectors The angle difference ANGLE between the negative-sequence current and the polarizing quantity is calculated as shown below and is available in the Monitored data view.
Page 752: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.4.2.7 Application The ability of a protection relay to provide direction information for faults is referred to as its directional security. It is extremely important for the directional protection function to identify the direction of the fault relative to the location of the protection relay.
Page 753: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Max reverse angle 0...90 Maximum phase angle in reverse direction Min forward angle 0...90 Minimum phase angle in forward direction Min reverse angle 0...90 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction Table 675: DNSPDOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter...
Page 754: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference I_OPER FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Calculated operating current DNSPDOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.4.2.11 Technical data Table 679: DNSPDOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy...
Page 755: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.4.3.2 Function block GUID-1B0EDB5B-E1C0-4CEC-90D0-FA550B5A4443 V1 EN Figure 411: Function block 4.4.3.3 Functionality The phase discontinuity protection function PDNSPTOC is used for detecting unbalance situations caused by broken conductors. The function starts and operates when the unbalance current I exceeds the set limit.
Page 756 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer OPERATE Level detector START Blocking current logic check BLOCK GUID-77CC7147-960F-4055-B5B9-DF9134968B31 V1 EN Figure 412: Functional module diagram The I module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current. It reports the calculated value to the level detector. Level detector The level detector compares the calculated ratio of the negative- and positive- sequence currents to the set Start value.
Page 757: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
Page 758: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-D79D1AA3-279C-4805-8A56-C9C19D7EF452 V1 EN Figure 414: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in phase A with the ratio of negative-sequence and positive-sequence currents 4.4.3.7 Signals Table 681: PDNSPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents...
Page 759: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 685: PDNSPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Min phase current 0.05...0.30 0.01 0.10 Minimum phase current 4.4.3.9 Monitored data Table 686: PDNSPTOC Monitored data Name Type...
Page 760: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.4.4.2 Function block GUID-3B4A16D2-1F48-41E0-8F2C-E32247917609 V1 EN Figure 415: Function block 4.4.4.3 Functionality The phase reversal protection function PREVPTOC is used to detect the reversed connection of the phases to a three-phase motor by monitoring the negative phase sequence current I of the motor.
Page 761: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The operation of PREVPTOC can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer OPERATE Level detector START BLOCK GUID-345DEF01-F242-4FEF-BA3F-48452E9555F8 V1 EN Figure 416: Functional module diagram Level detector The level detector compares the negative-sequence current to the set Start value.
Page 762: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.4.4.7 Signals Table 689: PREVPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 690: PREVPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN...
Page 763: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.4.4.10 Technical data Table 694: PREVPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 764: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions full load current, which can severely heat the motor. MNSPTOC detects the large negative-sequence current and disconnects the motor. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function outputs, timers or the function itself. 4.4.5.4 Analog channel configuration MNSPTOC has one analog group input which must be properly configured.
Page 765: Timer Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 766 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions calculation or integration starts immediately when the current exceeds the set Start value and the START output is activated. The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time mode.
Page 767 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-2E232A83-5363-4153-8085-34BC36BF0F28 V1 EN Figure 419: MNSPTOC Inverse Curve A If the negative sequence current drops below the Start value setting, the reset time is defined as:   = ⋅     (Equation 192) GUID-1A0607E9-C631-4AC9-A195-7D0E13AD9C52 V1 EN t[s] Reset time in seconds...
Page 768 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions When the reset period is initiated, the time for which START has been active is saved. If the fault reoccurs, that is, the negative-sequence current rises above the set value during the reset period, the operate calculations are continued using the saved values. If the reset period elapses without a fault being detected, the operate timer is reset and the saved values of start time and integration are cleared.
Page 769 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-14B1A333-2759-4189-B3B2-05E173A84EB7 V1 EN Figure 420: MNSPTOC Inverse Curve B If the fault disappears, the negative-sequence current drops below the Start value setting and the START output is deactivated. The function does not reset instantaneously. Resetting depends on the equation or the Cooling time setting. The timer is reset in two ways: •...
Page 770: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions depends on the value of the negative-sequence current. If the sum reaches zero without a fault being detected, the accumulation stops and the timer is reset. • If the reset time set through the Cooling time setting elapses without a fault being detected, the timer is reset.
Page 771: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 697: MNSPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Overheated machine reconnection blocking 4.4.5.9 Settings Table 698: MNSPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.01...0.50...
Page 772: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.4.5.10 Monitored data Table 701: MNSPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time T_ENARESTART INT32 0...10000 Estimated time to reset of block restart MNSPTOC Enum 1=on...
Page 773: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.1.2 Function block GUID-8B2A36C5-09C8-4EE7-AA05-7BA6595923B6 V1 EN Figure 421: Function block 4.5.1.3 Functionality The three-phase overvoltage protection function PHPTOV is applied on power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines, to protect the system from excessive voltages that could damage the insulation and cause insulation breakdown.
Page 774: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.5.1.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of PHPTOV can be described using a module diagram.
Page 775 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected. If the number of faulty phases match with the set Num of start phases, the phase selection logic activates the Timer.
Page 776 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-130E2B9B-6D0B-47A6-9556-9C38BF9242D4 V1 EN Figure 423: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
Page 777: Timer Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 778: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • The defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator when the generator is in isolated operation. • Operation under manual control with the voltage regulator out of service. A sudden variation of load, in particular the reactive power component, gives rise to a substantial change in voltage because of the inherent large voltage regulation of a typical alternator.
Page 779: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 710: PHPTOV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time reset 2=Decrease Op...
Page 780: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.1.11 Technical data Table 714: PHPTOV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 781: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timer or the function itself. 4.5.2.4 Analog channel configuration PHPTUV has one analog group input which must be properly configured. Table 715: Analog inputs Input Description...
Page 782 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions OPERATE U_A_AB Timer Phase OPR_A U_B_BC Level selection detector U_C_CA OPR_B logic OPR_C START ST_A Blocking BLOCK logic ST_B ST_C GUID-4B98F2BD-8A2A-4668-9121-F0A6F0BC8B99 V1 EN Figure 425: Functional module diagram Level detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are compared phase-wise to the set Start value.
Page 783 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see the IDMT curves for undervoltage protection section in this manual. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the IDMT, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 784 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-BE1D4F63-1205-4DC6-824D-BC280A0074B8 V1 EN Figure 426: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
Page 785: Timer Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 786: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions PHPTUV deals with low voltage conditions at power system frequency. Low voltage conditions can be caused by: • Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or incorrect settings under manual control (symmetrical voltage decrease) • Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease) •...
Page 787: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 723: PHPTUV Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate 2=2 out of 3 activation...
Page 788: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.2.11 Technical data Table 726: PHPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 789: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The function starts when the residual voltage exceeds the set limit. ROVPTOV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristic. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, the definite timer or the function itself. 4.5.3.4 Analog channel configuration ROVPTOV has one analog group input which must be properly configured.
Page 790: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer OPERATE Level URES detector START Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-FC68DB3E-7761-4555-ADD4-84CF9B49AD76 V1 EN Figure 428: Functional module diagram Level detector The residual voltage is compared to the set Start value. If the value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector sends an enable signal to the timer.
Page 791: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions In compensated and isolated neutral systems, the system neutral voltage, that is, the residual voltage, increases in case of any fault connected to earth. Depending on the type of the fault and the fault resistance, the residual voltage reaches different values. The highest residual voltage, equal to the phase-to-earth voltage, is achieved for a single-phase earth fault.
Page 792: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 733: ROVPTOV Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time 4.5.3.9 Monitored data Table 734: ROVPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32...
Page 793: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.4.2 Function block GUID-92444957-A01E-46AD-9CDF-7FA20C4F3C98 V1 EN Figure 429: Function block 4.5.4.3 Functionality The positive-sequence overvoltage protection function PSPTOV is used as an alternative to the ordinary three-phase overvoltage protection. PSPTOV is used for supervision and for detection of abnormal conditions, and, together with the other protection functions, increases the security of the protection system.
Page 794: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.4.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on" and "off". The operation of PSPTOV can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 795: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines, to detect overvoltage conditions. PSPTOV can be used in combination with low-current signals or a directional reactive overpower function to identify the distribution line with an open remote end. PSPTOV can also be used to initiate voltage correction measures, such as insertion of shunt reactors or switching out capacitor banks, to control the voltage.
Page 796: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.4.8 Settings Table 740: PSPTOV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.400...1.600 0.001 0.650 Start value Operate delay time 40...120000 Operate delay time Table 741: PSPTOV Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 797: Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Protection Nsptov
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Characteristic Value Retardation time <35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,… 1) Positive-sequence voltage before fault = 0.0 ×...
Page 798: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources. There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 746: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measurements The function requires that any two voltage channels are connected.
Page 799: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 800: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions An appropriate value for the setting parameter Voltage start value is approximately 3 percent of U . A suitable value for the setting parameter Operate delay time depends on the application. If the NSPTOV operation is used as backup protection, the operate time should be set in accordance with the operate time of NSPTOC used as main protection.
Page 801: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.5.9 Monitored data Table 752: NSPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time NSPTOV Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.5.5.10 Technical data Table 753: NSPTOV Technical data Characteristic...
Page 802: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.6.2 Function block GUID-62285A87-57D2-4638-877F-0234D0EA46C7 V1 EN Figure 433: Function block 4.5.6.3 Functionality The positive-sequence undervoltage protection function PSPTUV is used to detect positive-sequence undervoltage conditions. PSPTUV is used for the protection of small power generation plants. The function helps in isolating an embedded plant from a fault line when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to start an overcurrent function but high enough to maintain the arc.
Page 803: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.5.6.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on"...
Page 804: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 805: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions generator thermally and mechanically. This kind of loss of synchronism should not be mixed with the one between an island and the utility network. In the islanding situation, the condition of the generator itself is normal but the phase angle and the frequency of the phase-to-phase voltage can be different from the corresponding voltage in the rest of the network.
Page 806: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 761: PSPTUV Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Relative hysteresis 1.0...5.0 Relative hysteresis for operation 4.5.6.9 Monitored data Table 762: PSPTUV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 807: Overexcitation Protection Oepvph
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.7 Overexcitation protection OEPVPH 4.5.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Overexcitation protection OEPVPH U/f> 4.5.7.2 Function block GUID-AD96FD45-4B1A-4A5F-90CD-7F208FF6182D V1 EN Figure 435: Function block 4.5.7.3 Functionality The overexcitation protection function OEPVPH is used to protect generators and power transformers against an excessive flux density and saturation of the magnetic core.
Page 808: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions There are a few special conditions which must be noted with the configuration. Table 765: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measurements The function can work with at least one voltage channel connected (A, B or C according to Phase selection “1”, “2”...
Page 809 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions equipment. The leakage reactance of the transformer or generator is set through the Leakage React setting in percentage of the Z base. The internal induced voltage (E) is calculated from the measured voltage. The settings Voltage selection and Phase supervision determine which voltages and currents are to be used.
Page 810 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The calculated U/f ratio is scaled to a value based on the nominal U ratio. However, the highest allowed continuous voltage (in % U ) can be defined by setting the parameter Voltage Max Cont to change the basis of the voltage. The measured voltage is compared to the new base value to obtain the excitation level.
Page 811: Timer Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions of overexcitation. The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times. The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output. For the DT characteristics, the deactivation of the OPERATE output activates the cooling timer.
Page 812 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions time calculation or integration starts immediately when the excitation level exceeds the set Start value and the START output is activated. The OPERATE output is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator calculating the overexcitation situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time mode.
Page 813 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-616D6E96-3679-4FB9-86DB-DCF20A10639D V1 EN Figure 437: An example of a delayed reset in the inverse time characteristics. When the start becomes active during the reset period, the operate time counter continues from the level corresponding to the drop-off (reset time = 0.50 ·...
Page 814 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-8BE5C57A-BC25-4BF1-BEF3-EC0585F73218 V1 EN Figure 438: Operating time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve ("OvExt IDMT Crv1") for parameters a = 2.5, b = 115.0 and c = 4.886 Overexcitation IDMT curve 4 The base equation for the IDMT curve "OvExt IDMT Crv4" is: 0 18 −...
Page 815 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-23A13D60-4573-46B3-A8BB-AB60DC3DF1F1 V1 EN Figure 439: Operating time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve 4 ("OvExt IDMT Crv4") for different values of the Time multiplier setting when the Constant delay is 800 milliseconds The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output. If the excitation level increases above the set value when BLK_RESTART is active, the OPERATE output is activated immediately.
Page 816: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-905D260D-F1DD-475F-9EAD-016DFAD1183A V1 EN Figure 440: Example of an inverse time counter operation if START occurs when is inactive while COOL_ACTIVE is active. BLK_RESTART 4.5.7.7 Application If the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its designed limits, the leakage flux increases.
Page 817 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The curves that define the generator and transformer V/Hz limits must be coordinated properly to protect both equipment. If the generator can be operated with a leading power factor, the high-side voltage of the transformer can have a higher pu V/Hz than the generator V/Hz. This needs to be considered in a proper overexcitation protection of the transformer.
Page 818 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions − ⋅ leak (Equation 206) GUID-88D7F9BF-69A7-4956-A1EB-E66BE1FBD681 V1 EN E = 11500∠0°+ (5600∠-63.57°- 5600∠176.42°) · (0.170378∠90°) = 12490 V The excitation level M of the machine is calculated. 12490 49 98 Excitation level M = 1 1359 11000 1 00...
Page 819 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-89605736-9D42-4D40-8D61-6E69ACA20620 V1 EN Figure 441: Operating curve of "OvExt IDMT Crv2" based on the settings specified in example 3. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text. If the excitation level stays at 1.26, the operation occurs after 26.364 s as per the marked dot in Figure 441.
Page 820: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-2467CA86-8E62-4611-8D79-1AA1B482323D V1 EN Figure 442: Operating curve of “OvExt IDMT Crv4” based on the specified settings. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text. If the excitation level stays at 1.25, the operation occurs after 15.20 s. At the excitation level of 1.42, the time to operation would be 5.90 s as per the two dots in Figure 442.
Page 821: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.7.9 Settings Table 770: OEPVPH Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 100...200 Over excitation start value Operating curve type 5=ANSI Def. Time 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type 15=IEC Def.
Page 822: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.7.10 Monitored data Table 773: OEPVPH Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time (in %) T_ENARESTART INT32 0...10000 Estimated time to reset of block restart VOLTPERHZ FLOAT32...
Page 823: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.8.2 Function block GUID-85CE8BA6-4E28-41D3-BFAB-017583E50098 V1 EN Figure 443: Function block 4.5.8.3 Functionality The low-voltage ride-through protection function LVRTPTUV is principally a three- phase undervoltage protection. It differs from the traditional three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV by allowing the grid operators to define its own Low-Voltage Ride-Through (LVRT) curve for generators, as defined by local or national grid codes.
Page 824: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.8.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on" and "off". The operation of LVRTPTUV is described using a module diagram. All modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 825 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, voltage restores above Voltage start value, before OPERATE is activated, the function does not reset until maximum recovery time under consideration has elapsed, that is, START output remains active. LVRT curve is defined using time-voltage settings coordinates.
Page 826 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-4793314F-DFC1-4896-A349-72CC9DF11078 V1 EN Figure 446: Low voltage ride through example curve B Table 777: Settings for example A and B Settings Curve A Curve B Voltage start value 0.9 · Un 0.9 · Un Active coordinates Voltage level 1 0.2 ·...
Page 827: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-C0074B66-1817-4B36-B972-79F1828B70A1 V1 EN Figure 447: Typical example of operation of LVRTPTUV Activation of the BLOCK input resets the timers and deactivates the function outputs. 4.5.8.6 Application Distributed generation, mainly wind and solar farms, are rapidly increasing due to liberalized markets (deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources of energy.
Page 828: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions • At the time of system faults, the magnitude of the voltage may dip to Voltage level 1 for time defined by Recovery time 1. The generating unit has to remain connected to the network during such condition. This boundary defines area A. •...
Page 829: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 779: LVRTPTUV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.5.8.8 Settings Table 780: LVRTPTUV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage start value 0.05...1.20 0.01 0.90 Voltage value below which function starts Table 781:...
Page 830: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Recovery time 2 0...300000 1000 2nd time coordinate for defining LVRT curve Recovery time 3 0...300000 10000 3rd time coordinate for defining LVRT curve Recovery time 4 0...300000 10000 4th time coordinate for defining LVRT...
Page 831: Vector Shift Protection Vvsppam
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.9 Vector shift protection VVSPPAM 4.5.9.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM 78VS 4.5.9.2 Function block GUID-2DB3A1C8-221E-4F02-983A-DD76BAB577DE V1 EN Figure 449: Function block 4.5.9.3 Functionality The voltage vector shift protection function VVSPPAM, also known as vector surge...
Page 832: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 833: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The function is blocked and LOWAMPL_BLKD is activated, if the measured frequency deviates ±5% from the nominal value. The magnitude of calculated vector shift for three phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages, USHIFT_A_AB, USHIFT_B_BC and USHIFT_C_CA or positive sequence voltage U1SHIFT, which resulted in the activation of last OPERATE output, are available in the Monitored data view.
Page 834 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions neither the voltage or the frequency is controlled by the utility supply. These distributed generators are not equipped with voltage and frequency control; therefore, the voltage magnitude of an islanded network may not be kept within the desired limits which causes undefined voltage magnitudes during islanding situations and frequency instability.
Page 835: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions and cost effective, but each method has a non detectable zone. To overcome this problem, it is recommended to combine different criteria for detecting Loss of Mains. Two or more protection functions run in parallel to detect Loss of Mains. When all criteria are fulfilled to indicate Loss of Mains, an alarm or a trip can be generated.
Page 836: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 791: VVSPPAM Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Phase supervision 7=Ph A + B + C 8=Pos sequence Monitored voltage phase 8=Pos sequence 4.5.9.9 Monitored data Table 792: VVSPPAM Monitored data Name Type...
Page 837: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.10.2 Function block GUID-960385C8-204E-468B-BB95-5EDDFBF4ECA6 V1 EN Figure 452: Function block 4.5.10.3 Functionality The three-phase overvoltage variation protection function PHVPTOV monitors the quality of the voltages. The function evaluates the power quality in the voltage by calculating the average RMS value of the voltage over a set period.
Page 838: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.5.10.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on"...
Page 839 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The RMS refresh voltage is calculated by aggregating the U 10cycles 12cycles voltage over a time period of T . The time period T depends on the setting refresh refresh Time interval. Time interval in seconds ...
Page 840 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The calculated average voltage can be reset by the RESET binary input. The calculated average voltage can also be reset using PHVPTOV1 Reset mean on the Clear menu. When the INITIALIZE input is activated, the average voltage measurement value is initialized with the 10/12-cycle RMS voltage.
Page 841: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions immediately reset. The function resets when the calculated average RMS value drops below Start value. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 842: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.10.7 Signals Table 796: PHVPTOV Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode INITIALIZE BOOLEAN 0=False Initialize the voltage average measurement RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset the voltage average measurement values Table 797:...
Page 843: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.5.10.9 Monitored data Table 801: PHVPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time U_MEAN_A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Mean value of phase to earth voltage A U_MEAN_B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00...
Page 844: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.6.1.2 Function block GUID-8043FBFA-D45D-4A87-83C4-B0D779B4053C V1 EN Figure 454: Function block 4.6.1.3 Functionality The frequency protection function FRPFRQ is used to protect network components against abnormal frequency conditions. The function provides basic overfrequency, underfrequency and frequency rate-of- change protection.
Page 845: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.6.1.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of FRPFRQ can be described using a module diagram.
Page 846 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The protection relay does not accept a value between -0.002...+0.002 for the Start value df/dt setting. Operate logic This module is used for combining different protection criteria based on the frequency and the frequency gradient measurement to achieve a more sophisticated behavior of the function.
Page 847 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Operation mode Description Freq< + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods. When the measured Start value frequency is below the set value of the Freq< setting, the frequency gradient protection is enabled.
Page 848 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Operation mode Description Freq> + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods. When the measured Start value frequency exceeds the set value of the Freq> setting, the frequency gradient protection is enabled.
Page 849: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The module calculates the start duration value which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and set operate time (DT). The start duration is available according to the selected value of the Operation mode setting. Table 806: Start duration value Operation mode in use...
Page 850: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions frequency in a power system indicates that the generated power is too low to meet the demands of the load connected to the power grid. The underfrequency can occur as a result of the overload of generators operating in an isolated system.
Page 851: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.6.1.8 Settings Table 809: FRPFRQ Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 1=Freq< 1=Freq< Frequency protection operation mode 2=Freq> selection 3=df/dt 4=Freq< + df/dt 5=Freq> + df/dt 6=Freq< OR df/dt 7=Freq>...
Page 852: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.6.1.10 Technical data Table 813: FRPFRQ Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy f>/f< ±5 mHz df/dt ±50 mHz/s (in range |df/dt| <5 Hz/s) ±2.0% of the set value (in range 5 Hz/s < |df/dt| < 15 Hz/s) Start time f>/f<...
Page 853: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions and high df/dt and the activation of LSHDPFRQ. This time delay can be set and it is used to prevent unwanted load-shedding actions when the system frequency recovers to the normal level. Throughout this document, “high df/dt” is used to mean “a high rate of change of the frequency in negative direction.”...
Page 854 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions ST_FRQ Under frequency detection OPR_FRQ dF/dt ST_FRG df/dt detection OPR_FRG START Load shedding control OPERATE ST_REST Restore MAN_RESTORE detection RESTORE BLK_REST Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-FF439F5A-BA50-487B-8AE4-1253A7498538 V1 EN Figure 457: Functional module diagram Underfrequency detection The underfrequency detection measures the input frequency calculated from the voltage signal.
Page 855 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value of the Reset delay time setting, the timer resets and the ST_FRG output is deactivated. Load-shedding control The way of load-shedding, that is, whether to operate based on underfrequency or high df/dt or both, is defined with the Load shed mode user setting.
Page 856 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s 50 Hz Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 49 Hz 48.75 Hz Time [s]...
Page 857 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms 50 Hz Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 49 Hz Time [s] ST_FRG...
Page 858: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Restoring mode Description Disabled Load restoration is disabled. Restore Auto In the “Auto” mode, input frequency is continuously compared to the start Val setting. The restore detection module includes a timer with the DT characteristics.
Page 859 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions margin. The safe margin of operation is usually less than ±0.5 Hz. The system frequency stability is one of the main concerns in the transmission and distribution network operation and control. To protect the frequency-sensitive electrical equipment in the network, departure from the allowed band for safe operation should be inhibited.
Page 860 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Frequency [Hz] 50 Hz 48.8 Hz Time [s] START OPERATE ST_REST RESTORE Set Restore delay time Restore timer Timer Timer Timer starts suspended continues GUID-ABA6CF3D-52B1-4782-931D-5B96D095B3E2 V1 EN Figure 460: Operation of the load-shedding function Power system protection by load-shedding The decision on the amount of load that is required to be shed is taken through the measurement of frequency and the rate of change of frequency (df/dt).
Page 861 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If a moderate system operates at 50 Hz, an underfrequency should be set for different steps from 49.2 Hz to 47.5 Hz in steps of 0.3 – 0.4 Hz. The operating time for the underfrequency can be set from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second stepwise from a higher frequency value to a lower frequency value.
Page 862: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 818: Setting for a five-step restoring operation Load-shedding steps Restore start Val setting Restore delay time setting 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 200000 ms 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 160000 ms 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 100000 ms 0.990 ·...
Page 863: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate Tm Freq 80...200000 Time delay to operate for under frequency stage Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 Time delay to operate for df/dt stage Restore start Val 0.800...1.200 0.001 0.998 Restore frequency setting value...
Page 864: Impedance Protection
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Impedance protection 4.7.1 Distance protection DSTPDIS 4.7.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Distance protection DSTPDIS Z< 21P, 21N 4.7.1.2 Function block GUID-AA9787D5-49E4-4C8D-BBFB-B577438683E4 V1 EN Figure 461: Function block 4.7.1.3 Functionality...
Page 865 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Under impedance start charactristics Zone Z4 Zone Z3 Zone Z2 Load encroachment area Zone Z1 Zone Z5 GUID-6328DB81-8832-48DE-816C-E1899762F281 V2 EN Figure 462: Zones of DSTPDIS function (example 1) Under impedance start characteristics Zone Z4 Zone Z3 Load encroachment Zone Z2...
Page 866 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Directional mode Znx Non-directional Forward Reverse Imp zone shape Quadrilateral Pol. Pol. Mho (circular) Pol. Pol. Mho Dir line Offset Dir line Pol. Pol. Bullet (combi) Pol. = polarization method affects (mho)zone shape GUID-179A8D80-55DB-4CEF-9931-68C06F53CA0B V1 EN Figure 464: Possible combinations of Directional mode Znx and Zone characteristics settings.
Page 867: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Average Operate time SIR 50 SIR 30 SIR 10 SIR 5 SIR 0.5 SIR 0.2 Fault location [% of zone reach] GUID-B0D18BB9-21AB-4AEB-9943-D56773D09E64 V1 EN Figure 465: Average operate time of DSTPDIS according to IEC 60255-121 network models Short line and Long line (50 Hz) SIR curves are plotted from the data which includes variation of fault location (0…...
Page 868: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 826: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents Three-phase currents Necessary when Par line Comp zone x is set to I3P_PAR True Three-phase currents EF detection Mod GFC is set to Necessary when I3P_REF "Io AND IoRef"...
Page 869 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions General Fault Criteria (GFC) Zone Z1 Earth-fault detection function Zone Z2 Directional function for earth faults Zone Z3 Fault loop selection and back-up protection Zone Z4 Cross-country fault detection function for Zone Z5 high-impedance earthed networks Phase preference logic for high-impedance earthed networks Fault loop selection logic for low-impedance...
Page 870 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The earth-fault detection is indicated with the EARTH_FLT monitored data. The earth-fault detection criterion can be defined with the EF detection Mod GFC setting. The fundamental criterion is based on the residual current. The residual voltage and reference neutral current, measured from the transformer neutral point, can be used for the earth-fault detection criteria.
Page 871 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Stab slope 2 GFC Gnd Op current 2 GFC Blocking due to CT saturation Stab slope 1 GFC Blocking due to CT errors Gnd Op current GFC maxPh A Ph Stab value GFC GUID-7404A72D-C37B-4480-9829-8166C3C48167 V2 EN Figure 467: Stabilized residual current measurement for earth-fault detection The residual voltage can also be used as a complementary criterion for earth-fault...
Page 872 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Pol. quantity maximum torque line Min phase angle GFC Chr angle GFC = +45 deg. Max phase angle GFC Max phase angle GFC Min phase angle GFC GUID-41EFE5E8-E6CA-47E7-877E-6F4952B6F155 V2 EN Figure 468: Characteristic of the directional function for earth faults The Chr angle GFC setting, also known as relay characteristic angle or basic angle, is used to turn the directional characteristic.
Page 873 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The polarizing quantity is -U and the operating quantity is I in case of zero-sequence voltage polarization. The polarizing quantity is -U and the operating quantity is I in case of negative-sequence polarization. In case of zero-sequence current polarization "Zero seq. cur.", the zero-sequence current I of the protected line is the operating quantity while another reference zero- sequence current I...
Page 874 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions resistive and reactive reaches. The underimpedance method is supervised by a load encroachment logic which ensures that the load impedance does not interfere with the faulted phase selection. The ”OC AND Und impedance” method combines “Overcurrent” and “Under impedance”...
Page 875 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 833: Enumeration values for integer monitored data signal RELEASE_PP Enumerator name Value No fault AB Fault BC Fault CA Fault ABC Fault The phase selection function can be set to issue an operate signal as the faulted phase selection uses independent measuring elements from the distance protection zones.
Page 876 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Start of element START_GFC STARTS_GFC RELEASE PE RELEASE PP > & I > & TRUE CA Fault CA Fault CA Fault EARTH_FLT TRUE ABC Fault No fault ABC Fault > & I > & I >...
Page 877 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 835: Conversion from element start to monitored data signals Start of element START_GFC STARTS_GFC RELEASE PE RELEASE PP > & U < & TRUE AG Fault AG Fault No fault EARTH_FLT | >> & EARTH_FLT >...
Page 878 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Faulted phase selection, the underimpedance method The "Under impedance" and "OC AND Und impedance" methods use fault loop impedance for identifying the faulted phases. The advantage of the underimpedance criterion is that the sensitivity of the fault detection is independent of the source impedance.
Page 879 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Ris Gnd Rv Rch GFC, Ris PP Fwd Rch GFC and Ris PP Rv Rch GFC settings. The characteristic is always mirror-symmetric around the reactance axis. The impedance settings are in primary ohms. In case of heavy loaded feeders, the optional load encroachment logic can be enabled with the Load Dsr mode GFC setting.
Page 880 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 836: Conversion from element start to monitored data signals Start of element START_GFC STARTS_GFC RELEASE PE RELEASE PP < & TRUE AG Fault AG Fault No fault EARTH_FLT < & TRUE BG Fault BG Fault No fault EARTH_FLT...
Page 881 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions transforms the fault into an ordinary single-phase earth fault by selectively tripping one of the faulted feeders. The cross-country detecting function can become active only if the network is either isolated or high-impedance earthed (System grounding GFC = "High impedance" or selection "From input"...
Page 882 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions System grounding GFC = ”High impedance” System grounding GFC = ”From input” SYS_EARTHING = TRUE EARTH_FLT = TRUE PP voltage XC GFC U< U< XC_FLT U< Gnd Op A XC GFC I> Cross-country Dl GFC GUID-A6D0B9DE-B5F2-4981-BE65-2C22BD7888EB V2 EN Figure 472: Cross-country fault detection logic for high-impedance earthed...
Page 883 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions selected for measurement. In such a case, simultaneous tripping of both faulted feeders during a cross-country fault is expected. Example Consider a cross-country fault where phases A and B become faulted simultaneously. All relays, R1, R2, R3 and R4, are equipped with an "Acyc C-A-B" phase preference scheme.
Page 884 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 837: Supported phase preference logic schemes for high-impedance earthed networks and their operation in case of single phase start with and without cross-country fault detection Ph Prf mode Hi Z GFC Faulted loops A &...
Page 885 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Ph Pref logic Hi Imp Faulted loops A & B XC_FLT B & C XC_FLT C & A XC_FLT A & B XC_FLT B & C XC_FLT C & A XC_FLT RELEASE_PE RELEASE_PP Acyc A-B-C AB Fault BC Fault CA Fault...
Page 886 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Lagging phase-to-earth loop Phase-to-phase loop Leading phase-to-earth loop GUID-E6D2705B-840A-4EDB-9839-5ACFF5ECB4E0 V1 EN Figure 475: Impedance measured during a two-phase-to-earth fault The available faulted loop selection logic schemes allow blocking the phase-earth loop of the leading phase to prevent overreaching Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC = "BLK leading PE".
Page 887 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 841: Supported faulted loop phase selection schemes for low-impedance earthed networks and their influence on the RELEASE_PP monitored data Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC Element start All loops PE only PP only BLK leading PE BLK lagging PE RELEASE_PP &...
Page 888 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Under impedance start characteristics Zone Z4 Zone Z3 Load encroachment Zone Z2 area Zone Z1 Zone Z5 GUID-4BCCC542-04DB-4FC3-A4E6-D3CC4009CE32 V2 EN Figure 477: Zones of DSTPDIS function (example 2) Each zone in DSTPDIS provides three independent phase-to-earth and three phase-to- phase measuring elements.
Page 889 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 842: STARTS_Zx information Value Value information No zone starts AG Fault BG Fault AG Fault, BG Fault CG Fault AG Fault, CG Fault BG Fault, CG Fault AG Fault, BG Fault, CG Fault AB Fault AG Fault, AB Fault BG Fault, AB Fault...
Page 890 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Value Value information BG Fault, CG Fault, CA Fault AG Fault, BG Fault, CG Fault, CA Fault AB Fault, CA Fault AG Fault, AB Fault, CA Fault BG Fault, AB Fault, CA Fault AG Fault, BG Fault, AB Fault, CA Fault CG Fault, AB Fault, CA Fault AG Fault, CG Fault, AB Fault, CA Fault BG Fault, CG Fault, AB Fault, CA Fault...
Page 891 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Impedance measurement DSTPDIS provides three independent phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring elements per zone. The three-phase fault is measured with a dedicated measurement element. The impedance measurement is done similarly regardless of the zone shape. The operation is based on impedance mapping where the fault loop impedance is first calculated and then compared with the zone boundaries.
Page 892 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-93DCB3EB-9200-4566-B4BF-54DBAF25AFE1 V1 EN Figure 478: The fault loop impedance model for phase-to-earth impedance measuring elements Positive-sequence resistance from measuring point to fault location Positive-sequence reactance from measuring point to fault location Earth return path resistance = (R )/3 from measuring point to fault location Earth return path reactance = (X )/3 from measuring point to fault location...
Page 893 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Load import (No load compensation) Load compensation in use Load export (No load compensation) GUID-5D30395A-5108-40AE-B055-1B4E82A3BA3D V1 EN Figure 479: Operation principle of load compensation functionality When three-phase feeders are placed close to each other, a mutual inductive zero- sequence coupling of the current path exists.
Page 894 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Z< Parallel lines are mutually coupled GUID-224B037C-3A58-4557-AE27-A65B6F5581B4 V1 EN Figure 480: Operation principle of parallel line compensation functionality The operation time delay is defined with the Gnd operate Dl Znx (x = 1...5) setting. The timer can be disabled with the Gnd Op Dl mode Znx = "False"...
Page 895 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-BE30020E-397F-44FC-84B9-77D307E0DB55 V1 EN Figure 481: The fault loop impedance model for phase-to-phase impedance measuring elements Positive-sequence resistance from measuring point to fault location Positive-sequence reactance from measuring point to fault location Physical fault resistance between phases, for example, arc resistance The phase-to-phase impedance measuring elements measure only half of the physical fault resistance between phases.
Page 896 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Three-phase measuring element reach = Z + R = R + j X X + R (Equation 223) GUID-878BFBA3-D18F-48E0-90F4-BFDD29BC49D4 V1 EN GUID-B424276E-35A7-4DCA-8559-3948391BF753 V1 EN Figure 482: The fault loop impedance model for three-phase impedance measuring element Positive-sequence resistance from measuring point to fault location Positive-sequence reactance from measuring point to fault location...
Page 897 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions In case of non-directional characteristics, the reactive reach in reverse direction is defined with the X1 reverse zone x (x = 1...5) setting. The characteristic line angle, denoted as α, is the same for both forward and reverse direction. Forward Reverse Non-directional...
Page 898 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions In case of non-directional characteristics, the reactive reach in reverse direction is defined with the X1 reverse zone x (x = 1...5) setting. The total reactive reach in reverse direction includes a part which is common to both forward and reverse direction. This part is automatically calculated based on the values of the settings R1 zone x, R0 zone 0, X1 zone x and X0 zone x.
Page 899 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Forward Reverse Non-directional Z1 angle zone x GUID-FBAFADF9-3559-4113-BC47-3A99C4116E1F V1 EN Figure 486: Settings which define the line reach for phase-to-phase or three- phase impedance measuring elements if Impedance mode Zn = "Polar" In case of phase-to-earth impedance measuring elements, the line reach is defined with: •...
Page 900 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The total reactive reach in reverse direction includes a part which is defined by the residual compensation factor K . The characteristic line angle, denoted as α, is the same for forward and reverse direction. Forward Reverse Non-directional...
Page 901 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Forward Reverse Non-directional Min Ris Gnd Rch Znx Min Ris Gnd Rch Znx Max Ris Gnd Rch Znx Tilt angle zone x Tilt angle zone x Min Ris Gnd Rch Znx Min Ris Gnd Rch Znx Tilt angle zone x Max Ris Gnd Rch Znx Min Ris Gnd Rch Znx...
Page 902 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Compensation of over-reaching with Compensation of under-reaching with under-reaching zone over-reaching zone Tilt angle zone x < 0 deg. Tilt angle zone x > 0 deg. Zone Z2 Zone Z1 GUID-A2493D2F-AED5-4525-9161-9101DBF09230 V1 EN Figure 489: Operation principle of top reactance line tilting The tilt angle must be carefully set.
Page 903 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions checked to see whether a non-zero TLT_ANG_CONFLICT value has been found although, internally, the polygon boundary has been closed for existing settings. Directional lines The direction of a zone is defined with setting Directional mode Znx = "Non- directional", "Forward"...
Page 904 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions impedance element is frozen after a fixed 100 ms of fictive voltage use, but the memory function enables impedance polarization to operate up to a maximum of 300 s. This time can be set with the Voltage Mem time setting. After set Voltage Mem time elapses, fictive voltage (and frozen impedance direction) can no more be used without memory refreshment by a healthy positive-sequence voltage and also the frozen impedance direction is reset.
Page 905 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Phase-to-earth Phase-to-phase (2· Z 1Line 0Line 1Line (2· Z )/3 + Z 1source 0source 1source GUID-E54983FE-9918-4B5A-A14F-67727209EAFC V2 EN Figure 491: Tripping characteristic in case the zone characteristic is "Mho (circular)" and Pol quantity zone is "Cross pol" In case of positive-sequence polarization "Pos.
Page 906 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions One alternative for polarization is also "Self pol" despite the drawbacks when using it as a polarization method. The mho circle does not expand when using this polarization method. In case of cross and positive-sequence polarization, the expansion of the mho circle is a positive feature as the fault resistance coverage is increased.
Page 907 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions ⋅ X1 zone x + X0 zone x)/3 α α ⋅ R1 zone x + R0 zone x)/3 α α X1 reverse zone x * (2 ⋅ X1 zone x + X0 zone x)/3 X1 zone x -X1 reverse zone x * (2...
Page 908 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Directional mode Znx Non-directional Forward Reverse Imp zone shape Quadrilateral Pol. Pol. Mho (circular) Pol. Pol. Mho Dir line Offset Dir line Pol. Pol. Bullet (combi) Pol. = polarization method affects (mho)zone shape GUID-179A8D80-55DB-4CEF-9931-68C06F53CA0B V1 EN Figure 495: Possible combinations of Directional mode Znx and zone characteristics settings.
Page 909: Recorded Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Directional mode Zx Non-directional Forward Reverse Pol. Pol. Pol. = polarization method affects (mho)zone shape GUID-EBCB3227-F3EB-4DE9-929B-31EB26C5A295 V1 EN Figure 496: Bullet combi tripping characteristic. Pol. in the figure means the shape of the characteristic is affected by the selected polarization method, Pol quantity zone = "Cross pol", "Pos.
Page 910 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The values of parameter Operate of all zones indicate by a number (0...31) which zones have been operated. Table 846: Enumerator values for parameter Operate of all zones Enumerator value Description No zone operates Zone 1 Zone 2 Zones 1 and 2...
Page 911: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 847: Recorded data parameters regarding specific zones Parameter Description Fault/load Dir Znx Direction of fault or load zone Zx Dir resistance Znx Direction resistance, zone Zx Dir reactance Znx Direction reactance, zone Zx Flt loop 1st Ris Znx First PE-Loop resistance, zone Zx Flt loop 1st Rea Znx...
Page 912 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-F6347695-8117-4B59-8FC0-AF3BFDC9076E V1 EN Figure 497: Application scope of DSTPDIS Typically these networks are operated in ring or meshed type configurations. The switching state of these networks is changed frequently due to daily operation and load flow considerations.
Page 913: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions DSTPDIS has five flexible configurable impedance zones for protection (Z1...Z5). Phase-to-earth distance protection is a basic earth-fault protection in solidly or low- impedance earthed networks. Together with the phase preference logic, it also serves as a selective protection function at cross-country faults in isolated or Petersen coil compensated networks.
Page 914: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Description OPERATE_Z5 BOOLEAN Time delayed operate signal, zone 5 START_GFC BOOLEAN Start, GFC START_Z1 BOOLEAN General start signal, zone 1 START_Z2 BOOLEAN General start signal, zone 2 START_Z3 BOOLEAN General start signal, zone 3 START_Z4 BOOLEAN General start signal, zone 4...
Page 915 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description X PP Rv reach GFC 0.00...3000.00 0.01 40.00 Reactive reverse reach for PP-loops, underimpedance, PSL Ris PP Fwd Rch GFC 0.00...100.00 0.01 30.00 Resistive forward reach for PP-loops, underimpedance, PSL Ris PP Rv Rch GFC 0.00...100.00...
Page 916 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description R0 zone 1 0.00...3000.00 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 1 X0 zone 1 0.00...3000.00 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence reactive reach, zone 1 Factor K0 zone 1 0.0...4.0 Residual compensation factor magnitude, zone 1...
Page 917 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Max Ris Gnd Rch Zn2 0.00...500.00 0.01 100.00 Maximum resistive reach of PE-loops, zone 2 Gnd operate Dl Zn2 20...60000 Time delay to operate of PE-loops, zone 2 Directional mode Zn3 1=Non-directional 2=Forward...
Page 918 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description R1 zone 4 0.00...3000.00 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 4 X1 zone 4 0.00...3000.00 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactive reach, zone 4 X1 reverse zone 4 0.00...3000.00 0.01 40.00...
Page 919 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min Ris PP Rch Zn5 0.00...100.00 0.01 30.00 Minimum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops, zone 5 Max Ris PP Rch Zn5 0.00...100.00 0.01 30.00 Maximum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops, zone 5 PP operate delay Zn5 20...60000...
Page 920 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Cross-country Dl GFC 0...10000 Time delay for residual current, XC-fault detection function Tilt angle zone 1 -45...45 Tilt angle (positive value increases zone area), zone 1 Par line Comp zone 1 0=False 0=False Enable parallel line compensation for PE-...
Page 921 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 852: DSTPDIS Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Phase voltage Meas 1=Accurate 1=Accurate Phase voltage measurement principle 2=Ph-to-ph without Select active zones 1=Zone 1 1=Zone 1 Active zones selection...
Page 922: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 853: DSTPDIS Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EF Cur stabilization 0=False 0=False EF current stabilization enabled 1=True Fact EF current Bal 1.000...2.000 0.001 1.200 Residual current ratio for parallel line compensation Zone timer mode 1=Independent...
Page 923 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction of fault or load 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_LOOP_R FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000. Resistance used in dir. evaluation, zone 1 DIR_LOOP_X FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000. Reactance used in dir. eval., zone 1 FLTLOOP_RFST FLOAT32...
Page 924 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Release PP-loop Enum -5=No fault Release signals for -4=ABCG Fault PP/3P loops. GFC -3=CAG Fault -2=BCG Fault -1=ABG Fault 1=AG Fault 2=BG Fault 3=CG Fault 4=AB Fault 5=BC Fault 6=CA Fault 7=ABC Fault Cross country fault...
Page 925 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Flt loop 1st Ris Zn2 FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000. First PE-loop resistance, zone 2 Flt loop 1st Rea Zn2 FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000. First PE-loop reactance, zone 2 Flt loop 2nd Ris Zn2 FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000.
Page 926: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Flt loop 2nd Rea Zn4 FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000. Second PE-loop reactance, zone 4 Flt PP-loop Ris Zn4 FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000. PP-loop resistance, zone Flt PP-loop Rea Zn4 FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000. PP-loop reactance, zone Phase reactance Zn4 FLOAT32 -3000.00...3000.
Page 927: Out Of Step Protection With Double Blinders Oosrpsb
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset time Typically 45 ms Reset ratio Typically 0.96/1.04 Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 1) Measured with static power output (SPO) 2) SIR = Source impedance ratio 4.7.2 Out of step protection with double blinders OOSRPSB 4.7.2.1...
Page 928: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.7.2.4 Analog channel configuration OOSRPSB has two analog group inputs which must be properly configured. Table 856: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents Three-phase voltages See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources.
Page 929 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Impedance calculation This module calculates the positive-sequence impedance (Z1) using positive- sequence voltage and current. For the module to calculate impedance it is required that the positive-sequence current is above Min Ps Seq current setting and the negative- sequence current is below the Max Ng Seq current setting.
Page 930 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-B317B96C-A7E4-4DE1-A50B-EE3A0364218B V1 EN Figure 501: Operating region for out of step with double blinder An impedance is only considered to be within the mho circle if it is also between the inner blinders. A third zone, Zone 3, can be enabled by setting Zone 3 enable to “Yes”. Zone 3 is defined to include the area outside of the circular mho characteristic but inside the area that is bound with the magnitude of the minimum positive-sequence current defined by setting Min Ps Seq.
Page 931 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-34CCAC6F-F2CD-4EBE-B668-AC34AABA389E V1 EN Figure 502: Defined zones The impedance is continuously monitored for detecting an out of step condition. When the impedance enters inside from the outer blinder, the out of step detection timer is triggered. If impedance remains between outer and inner blinder for the duration of the Swing time setting, output SWING is activated.
Page 932 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions slip counter is incremented after the set Operate delay time has elapsed. If the slip counter value is equal to the set number of slips in the respective enabled zone, the OPERATE output is activated. If the swing impedance passes through both zone 1 and zone 2, only the zone 1 slip counter is incremented.
Page 933 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The swing angles, δ and δ , are estimated from the measured impedance when crossing the blinders. It is the difference in these quantities that is important for determining the slip frequency. If the “Adaptive” option is selected, after detecting an OSB condition, the function further examines the slip frequency f , V dip time setting, and swing angle at the slip...
Page 934: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program.
Page 935: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-9E83BB4F-5171-43D0-9A4D-542E9193C473 V1 EN Figure 503: Example of out of step detection The shaded region indicates a fault zone in a distance protection function. For curve A, the impedance moves into the out of step zone and leaves slowly, indicating the occurrence of a swing that quickly stabilizes.
Page 936: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.7.2.8 Settings Table 860: OOSRPSB Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Oos operate mode 1=Way in 2=Way out Operate mode for tripping when out of 2=Way out step condition is detected 3=Adaptive Forward reach 0.00...6000.00...
Page 937: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 863: OOSRPSB Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min Ps Seq current 0.01...10.00 0.01 0.10 Minimum positive sequence current for operation Max Ng Seq current 0.01...10.00 0.01 0.20 Maximum negative sequence current for operation Breaker open time...
Page 938: Three-Phase Underexcitation Protection Uexpdis
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.7.3 Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS 4.7.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS X< 4.7.3.2 Function block GUID-65009094-9763-4444-B446-E5267DF06278 V1 EN Figure 504: Function block 4.7.3.3 Functionality The three-phase underexcitation protection function UEXPDIS is used to protect the...
Page 939: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 867: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measurements The function can work with one voltage channel Phase Sel for Z Clc set to "A or AB", "B connected ( Impedance or BC" or "C or CA"), if the setting Meas mode is se to "1Phase-to-earth"...
Page 940 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 868: Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation Measurement mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents 1Phase-earth A or AB U_A, I_A 1Phase-earth B or BC U_B, I_B 1Phase-earth C or CA U_C, I_C 1Phase-phase A or AB...
Page 941 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions X (Reactance) p.u. R (Resistance) p.u. Offset Diameter Displacement Operating Region GUID-F1D894E6-9661-43B5-8C4E-7E410012AEF5 V1 EN Figure 506: Operating region of the impedance mho circle A fault in Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) or in the excitation system may cause a total loss of excitation.
Page 942: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operating timer resets and the START output is deactivated. The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time (DT).
Page 943 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Q (Reactive power) p.u. Motor Generator Over-Excitation P (Active power) p.u. Under-Excitation =0.2 =0.0 Where, AB= Field current limit BC= Stator current limit CD= End region heating limit of stator. Due to leakage flux BH= Possible active power limit due to turbine output power limitation EF= Steady -state limit without AVR GUID-BFBC3D04-B01A-45A4-AEC7-41F91B24DBD7 V1 EN...
Page 944 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The setting parameters of the off-set mho circle are to be given in pu values. The base impedance (Z ) in ohms is: (Equation 232) GUID-C0AD6AFD-4D8B-4224-851B-CB2055CB1445 V1 EN rated (phase-to-phase) voltage in kV rated power of the protected machine in MVA The corresponding calculation to convert ohms to pu values is: (Equation 233) GUID-23686146-F889-453A-AF9B-360335720153 V1 EN...
Page 945: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions X (Reactance) R (Resistance) Relay operation characteristics a) Z locus in under excitation for heavily loaded machine b) Z locus in under excitation for lightly loaded machine c) Z locus for a fault in the network GUID-0EE0C3EF-974A-4E83-A7EC-E10AAFC3B61A V1 EN Figure 508: Typical impedance locus in underexcitation: a) heavy load b) light...
Page 946: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.7.3.8 Settings Table 872: UEXPDIS Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Diameter 1...6000 Diameter of the Mho diagram Offset -1000...1000 Offset of top of the impedance circle from the R-axis Displacement -1000...1000 Displacement of impedance circle centre...
Page 947: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Z_ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Impedance angle phase Z_AMPL_C FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 Impedance amplitude phase C Z_ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Impedance angle phase Z_AMPL_AB FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 Phase-to-phase A-B impedance amplitude Z_ANGLE_AB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Phase-to-phase A-B impedance phase angle...
Page 948: Three-Phase Underimpedance Protection Uzpdis
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.7.4 Three-phase underimpedance protection UZPDIS 4.7.4.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase underimpedance UZPDIS Z<G protection 4.7.4.2 Function block GUID-6CD1E41A-4095-4647-861D-C99A5D243D96 V1 EN Figure 509: Function block 4.7.4.3 Functionality The three-phase underimpedance protection UZPDIS is generally applied as a backup...
Page 949: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 878: Special conditions Condition Description U3P connected to real measurements The function can work with one voltage channel Phase Sel for Z Clc set to "AB", "BC" or connected ( Impedance Meas mode is set "CA"), if the setting to "1Phase-to-phase".
Page 950 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 879: Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation Impedance Meas mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation 1Phase-to-phase U AB I A I B − 1Phase-to-phase U BC I B I C −...
Page 951 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-78F8B964-B80B-495B-9064-DFB3123BC783 V1 EN Figure 511: Origin-centric circular operating characteristics More than one impedance value is available when Impedance Meas mode is set to "3Phase-to-phase", and the function considers the lowest impedance value for starting and operating. Timer Once activated, Timer activates START output.
Page 952: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode.
Page 953 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-1335EC74-159F-4D76-AF24-5AA155FD4A3C V1 EN Figure 512: Short circuit current waveform, fault occurs at time 0 seconds (Current setting limit is multiplied by the square root of 2) The phase voltage in a three-phase short circuit when a fault occurs at time = 0 s is shown in Figure 513.
Page 954 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-9260A322-2431-4453-A0F3-D703F9EE57AE V1 EN Figure 513: Short-circuit voltage waveform, fault occurs at time 0 seconds In a typical impedance trajectory during a short circuit, the fault impedance remains inside the impedance circle for a longer time, in which case the underimpedance protection provides longer tripping delay times to maintain the time selectivity.
Page 955 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-DBC15F04-6CBB-4616-883B-00F4B6EA9122 V1 EN Figure 514: Typical impedance trajectory during a short circuit Underimpedance protection for transformers The underimpedance function is used as a short circuit protection instead of the overcurrent protection. It is also used as a backup to the differential protection of transformers.
Page 956 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions mainly protects the generator bus, the low-voltage part of the step-up transformer and a part of the stator winding against any short circuits. The voltages should be measured from the generator terminals and the phase currents from the neutral point of the generator.
Page 957: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions calculated impedance could fall below the set operating limit even if there is no actual fault in the primary system. The blocking operation is provided by an external function block, the fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC, whose output is connected to the BLOCK input of UZPDIS. 4.7.4.7 Signals Table 880:...
Page 958: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.7.4.9 Monitored data Table 885: UZPDIS Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time (in %) Z_AMPL_AB FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 Phase-to-phase A-B impedance amplitude Z_AMPL_BC FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 Phase-to-phase B-C...
Page 959: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.8.1.2 Function block GUID-7AF40FC8-8E67-40A5-9F62-B144C73E2AB9 V1 EN Figure 516: Function block 4.8.1.3 Functionality The underpower protection function DUPPDPR is used for protecting generators and prime movers against the effects of very low power outputs or reverse power condition.
Page 960: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Improper analog channel configuration causes a validation error if the analog channels are not completely configured or they do not match with certain settings. For troubleshooting, check the contents of this chapter and also the preprocessing blocks in this document.
Page 961 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 889: Power calculation Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsA, PhsB, PhsC ⋅ ⋅ Arone ⋅ − ⋅ Pos Seq = ⋅ ⋅ PhsAB ⋅ ⋅ − PhsBC ⋅ ⋅ − PhsCA ⋅ ⋅ −...
Page 962 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions A typical error is, for example, that the VT or CT poles are wrongly connected. This is seen as a power flow opposite to that of the intended direction. The Pol Reversal setting can be used to correct the situation. By setting the value to "True", the measured apparent power is turned 180 degrees.
Page 963: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer calculates the START_DUR value which indicates the percentage of the time elapsed since the activation of the START output with respect to Operate delay time. The value is available in the Monitored data. The DISABLE input can be used to coordinate the correct operation during the generator start-up situation.
Page 964: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions If the measuring errors are not compensated for, the underpower setting should not be lower than the sum of the current-measuring and voltage-measuring errors. For example, if the error of the current-measuring device is 2% and that of the voltage-measuring device is 1%, the minimum setting is (2 + 1)% = 3%.
Page 965: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 894: DUPPDPR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Measurement mode 1=PhsA, PhsB, 3=Pos Seq Selection of power calculation method PhsC 2=Arone 3=Pos Seq 4=PhsAB 5=PhsBC 6=PhsCA 7=PhsA 8=PhsB 9=PhsC Reset delay time 0...60000...
Page 966: Reverse Power/Directional Overpower Protection Doppdpr
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset ratio Typically 1.04 Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,… Measurement mode = “Pos Seq”...
Page 967: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.8.2.4 Analog channel configuration DOPPDPR has two analog group inputs which must be properly configured. Table 897: Analog inputs Input Description Three-phase currents Three-phase voltages See the preprocessing function blocks in this document for the possible signal sources.
Page 968 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Level detector Timer OPERATE Power U_AB calculation START U_BC U_CA Directional calculation BLOCK GUID-4C8DED4D-A6AC-4130-8DDB-55683D928577 V1 EN Figure 520: Functional module diagram Power calculation This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltages and currents.
Page 969 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsA = ⋅ ⋅ PhsB = ⋅ ⋅ PhsC = ⋅ ⋅ If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended. The calculated powers S, P, Q and the power factor angle PF_ANGL are available in the Monitored data view.
Page 970 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Non operating Operating area area Start value GUID-E4FE9866-CE85-4143-84B3-B28FE63A65AA V1 EN Figure 521: Operating characteristics with the Start Value setting, the Power angle setting being 0 and Directional mode "Forward" Operating area Start value  Non operating area GUID-F21046CD-7F5E-4210-BB26-C4A04CBFE9BC V1 EN...
Page 971: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The time characteristics are according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, the value of power drops below Start value before the operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated.
Page 972 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions one or more blades in the steam turbine or an inadvertent closing of the main stop valves are typical causes for the low steam flow. The steam turbines of turbo generators can be protected during a low steam flow with the overpower protection operating in reverse direction.
Page 973 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Operating area Operating Non operating area operating area area (a ) GUID-4051CF3B-5C4C-4F18-99F4-7D4BE2C3E7AA V1 EN Figure 523: Forward active overpower characteristics (a) and forward reactive overpower characteristics (b) Operating operating area area operating area Operating area GUID-84DF2DBF-1055-4B4A-A498-30C164DACD7F V1 EN Figure 524: Reverse active overpower characteristics (a) and reverse reactive...
Page 974: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.8.2.7 Signals Table 900: DOPPDPR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Three-phase currents SIGNAL Three-phase voltages BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 901: DOPPDPR Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN...
Page 975: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.8.2.9 Monitored data Table 905: DOPPDPR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 Active power FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 Reactive power FLOAT32 0.000...160.000 Apparent power PF_ANGLE FLOAT32...
Page 976: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.8.3.2 Function block GUID-38A8793B-4FAD-45CA-B71C-1F32A6155727 V1 EN Figure 525: Function block 4.8.3.3 Functionality The directional reactive power undervoltage protection function DQPTUV is used at the grid connection point of distributed power generating units as stipulated by various grid codes to prevent voltage collapse of the grid due to network faults.
Page 977: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in this document. The configuration can be written to the protection relay once the mismatch is corrected. 4.8.3.5 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "on" and "off". The operation of DQPTUV can be described using a module diagram.
Page 978 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Generator Motor under excitation under excitation Operating area Operating area Pwr sector Pwr sector Min reactive power reduction reduction Min Ps Seq current GUID-D101380B-3794-446D-9501-9AA42FCD308D V1 EN Figure 527: Operating area of DQPTUV function Quadrant II Generator produces active power, but draws reactive power (under-excited) Quadrant III Generator produces both active and reactive power The power direction can be reversed by setting Pol reversal to "True".
Page 979: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated.
Page 980: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Common point of coupling distributed power generation into the utility network REX640 Std. conf. ANSI SYNC 27RT U<RT 32Q, 27 Q>→, 3U< 32R/32O P>/Q> 47O-/59 U2>/3U> 47U+/27 U1</3U< 50L/50NL FUSEF f</f>, df/dt GUID-0B761565-320B-4058-AAF1-E300ECBCE51B V1 EN Figure 528: Application example of wind power plant as distributed power generation coupled into the utility network...
Page 981: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 910: DQPTUV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.8.3.8 Settings Table 911: DQPTUV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage start value 0.20...1.20 0.01 0.85 Start value for under voltage detection Operate delay time...
Page 982: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.8.3.10 Technical data Table 915: DQPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current and voltage: ±2 Hz Reactive power range |PF| <0.71 Power: ±3.0% or ±0.002 × Q Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 983: Analog Channel Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions In addition, the function can be applied as a power factor controller. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself. 4.8.4.4 Analog channel configuration MPUPF has two analog group inputs which must be properly configured.
Page 984 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Timer1 OPERATE Power Level factor detector 1 calculation START Timer2 DISABLE Level ALARM detector 2 Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-272C48EB-2351-4446-810C-D942DB07A60A V1 EN Figure 530: Functional module diagram Power factor calculation This module calculates three phase power factor using phase currents and voltages. The three-phase power is calculated from the fundamental frequency components (DFT) of the phase-to-earth voltages and phase-to-earth currents.
Page 985 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Generator convention Motor convention Forward reactive power Forward reactive power Synchronous Induction Induction Generator motor generator motor PF<0 (lead) PF>0 (lag) PF<0 (lead) PF>0 (lag) (PF = -1.0) (PF = -1.0) (PF = 1.0) (PF = 1.0) PF<0 (lag) PF<0 (lag)
Page 986: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions in the DT mode, the OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a power factor improves and exceeds the Start reset value in the direction as defined by Dir start reset value before the operate delay is exceeded or either magnitude of all three phase current or voltages goes below Current block value and Voltage block value respectively, the timer reset state is activated.
Page 987: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions In a power factor correction application, the ALARM and START outputs can be used as controls to switch in capacitive loads when the Alarm value and Start value settings, respectively, are exceeded. The ALARM output is set for a higher value to add the first corrective load and the START output set for a second stage of corrective load, if needed.
Page 988: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.8.4.8 Settings Table 920: MPUPF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value Dir 1=Lagging 1=Lagging PF direction for start value 2=Leading Start reset Val Dir 1=Lagging 1=Lagging PF direction for start reset value 2=Leading Alarm value Dir 1=Lagging...
Page 989: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.8.4.9 Monitored data Table 923: MPUPF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Calculated value of the 3– phase power factor MPUPF Enum 1=on...
Page 990: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.9.3 Functionality The arc protection function ARCSARC detects arc situations in air-insulated metal- clad switchgears caused by, for example, human errors during maintenance or insulation breakdown during operation. The function detects light from an arc either locally or via a remote light signal. The function also monitors phase and residual currents to be able to make accurate decisions on ongoing arcing situations.
Page 991 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Fixed delay 1 Level Operation OPERATE detector mode selector Fixed delay 2 Level IRES ARC_FLT_DET detector OPR_MODE REM_FLT_ARC ARC light ALARM Supervision detection BLOCK GUID-37CDAB96-E090-4843-812A-3D91EA30088C V2 EN Figure 533: Functional module diagram Level detector 1 The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Phase start value.
Page 992: Application
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions input is activated, the operation of the function is based on light information only. When the OPR_MODE input is deactivated, the operation of the function is based on both light and current information. When the required criteria are met, Fixed delay 1 timer is activated.
Page 993 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions compartments of the switchgear, for example, in the busbar compartment, the circuit breaker compartments, the bus riser and the outgoing feeder cable end compartments. The light detected by the lens sensor inputs is compared to an automatically adjusted reference level.
Page 994 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions SPO3 SPO1 GUID-0E9CBB16-39EA-4C24-8D51-8BF151AA753B V1 EN Figure 534: Arc protection with one protection relay Arc protection with several protection relays When using several protection relays, the protection relay protecting the outgoing feeder trips the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder when detecting an arc at the cable terminations.
Page 995 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions the busbar or in the breaker compartment via one of the other lens sensors, it generates a signal to the protection relay protecting the incoming feeder. When detecting the signal, the protection relay protecting the incoming feeder trips the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and generates an external trip signal to all protection relays protecting the outgoing feeders, which in turn results in tripping of all circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders.
Page 996: Signals
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions SPO2 SPO1 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io Binary horisontal GOOSE connection Ethernet switch GUID-52F672ED-BA22-4114-B3D7-1A793BE670F6 V1 EN Figure 536: Arc protection with several protection relays and high-speed outputs and GOOSE 4.9.7 Signals Table 927:...
Page 997: Settings
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions Table 928: ARCSARC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate ARC_FLT_DET BOOLEAN Fault arc detected=light signal output ALARM BOOLEAN Self supervision alarm 4.9.8 Settings Table 929: ARCSARC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default...
Page 998: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions 4.9.10 Technical data Table 932: ARCSARC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy ±3.0% of the set value or ±0.01 × I Operate time TC Minimum Typical Maximum Operation mode = 9 ms 10 ms 13 ms "Light+current"...
Page 999: Analog Input Configuration
Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The starting of the motor is supervised by monitoring the TRMS magnitude of all the phase currents or by monitoring the status of the circuit breaker connected to the motor. During the start-up period of the motor, STTPMSU calculates the integral of the I²t value.
Page 1000 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions CB_CLOSED Startup MOT_START supervisor Cumulative BLK_LK_ST LOCK_START startup protection ST_EMERG_ENA Thermal OPR_IIT stress calculator BLOCK Stall OPR_STALL STALL_IND protection GUID-7859F9EC-F854-479E-A931-CF2E1A0544D4 V1 EN Figure 538: Functional module diagram Startup supervisor This module detects the starting of the motor. The starting and stalling motor conditions are detected in four different modes of operation.
Page 1001 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions The Operation mode setting in the "IIt, CB" mode enables the function to calculate the value of the thermal stress when a start-up is monitored in addition to the CB_CLOSED input. In the "IIt & stall" mode, the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during the start-up condition.
Page 1002 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions These two events do not take place at the same instant, that is, the CB main contact is closed first, in which case the phase current value rises above 0.1 pu and after some delay the CB auxiliary contact gives the information of the CB_CLOSED input.
Page 1003 Section 4 1MRS759142 C Protection functions GUID-22BDB73F-F0A3-44F6-9AD4-F35CCC5D0C62 V1 EN GUID-0C960A25-8106-4FE0-B5AF-D15A478C8969 V1 EN Figure 540: Functionality of start-up supervision in the "IIt, CB" mode and the "IIt and stall, CB" mode The Str over delay time setting has different purposes in different modes of operation. •...

ABB RELION REX640 Technical Manual

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Section 1 Introduction

Section 2 REX640 Overview

Section 3 Basic Functions

Section 4 Protection Functions

Section 13 Protection Relay's Physical Connections

Section 14 Technical Data

Section 15 Protection Relay and Functionality Tests

Section 16 Applicable Standards and Regulations

Section 17 Glossary

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for ABB RELION REX640

Summary of Contents for ABB RELION REX640